Kia 2015 Soul Owners Manual Pdf 15soul En

User Manual: Kia 2015 Kia Soul Owners Manual Pdf 2015 Kia Soul Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 492

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehicles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

Foreword

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replacement parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfaction.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2015 Kia Canada Inc.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system or translation in
whole or part is not permitted without written authorization
from Kia Canada Inc..
Printed in Korea

Introduction

How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment

Safety features of your vehicle

Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag

Features of your vehicle

Keys / Door locks / Tailgate / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors
/ Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc.

table of contents

Driving your vehicle

Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / Brake system / Cruise control system /
Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.

What to do in an emergency

Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.

Maintenance

Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid /
Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Etc.

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Use of MTBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle Break-In Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about features, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.

The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all located in
the back of this manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.

You will find various types of safety
instructions in this manual. These
instructions were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.
Carefully read and follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these instructions.

WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation
in which harm, serious bodily
injury or death could result if the
warning is ignored.

CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.

✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.

1 2

Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels)
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust
emissions and spark plug fouling.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.)

WARNING - Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off.
Attempts to force more fuel
into the tank can cause fuel
overflow onto you and the
ground causing a risk of fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage, especially
in the event of an accident.

✽ NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the fuel cap open
warning indicator
light (or LCD
display) will illuminate.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle. Do not
use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Ethanol provides less
energy than gasoline and it attracts
water, and it is thus likely to reduce
your fuel efficiency and could lower
your MPG results. Methanol may
cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Discontinue using gasohol of
anykind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the
manufacturer's warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. Kia recommends that customers do not use
fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 10 percent.

✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel
system or any performance problems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.

1 3

Introduction

Other fuels
Using fuels such as
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained
fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metalic additives contained
fuels,
may cause vehicle and engine damage or cause plugging, misfiring,
poor acceleration, engine stalling,
catalyst melting, abnormal corrosion,
life cycle reduction, etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate

✽ NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use
of these fuels may not be covered by
your
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty.

1 4

Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful
manganese-based fuel additives
such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Kia does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emission control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the cluster may come on.

Use of MTBE
Kia recommends avoiding fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen
Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.

CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover damage
to the fuel system and any performance problems that are
caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

Introduction

Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.

Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good
quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which helps
prevent deposit formation in the
engine. These gasolines will help the
engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control
System. For more information on
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,
please go to the website (www.toptiergas.com).
For Customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, additives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline. If
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
available, one bottle of additive
added to the fuel tank at 7,500 miles
or every engine oil change is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.

1 5

Introduction
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS

VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS

As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control,
an accident or vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, track, etc.) give
this vehicle a higher center of gravity
than other types of vehicles. It is not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as a conventional 2-wheel
drive sedans or sports coupe. Avoid
sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an
accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure
to read the “Reducing the risk of a
rollover” driving guidelines, in
section 5 of this manual.

No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you
may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.

1 6

Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.

1 7

Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
■ Front view

1. Hood .....................................................4-32
2. Head lamp ...................................4-90, 7-78
3. Fog lamp .....................................4-93, 7-81
4. Tire and wheel...............................7-47, 8-4
5. Outside rearview mirror ........................4-51
6. Panoramic sunroof................................4-37
7. Front windshield wiper blades .....4-94, 7-41
8.Windows ................................................4-26

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OPS013001N

2 2

Your vehicle at a glance

■ Rear view

9. Door ......................................................4-19
10. Fuel filler lid ........................................4-34
11. Rear combination lamp.......................7-82
12. Tail gate ..............................................4-24
13. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-84
14. Rear window defroster......................4-102
15. Antenna ............................................4-146
16. Rearview camera................................4-88

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OPS013002N

2 3

Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Inside door handle ................................4-19
2. Power window switch ............................4-27
3. Power window lock button.....................4-30
4. Central door lock switch........................4-21
5. Outside rearview mirror control.............4-51
6. Outside rearview mirror folding .............4-52
7. Fuel filler lid open lever .........................4-34
8. Instrument panel illumination control
switch ...................................................4-55
9. Steering wheel heater On/Off button ....4-45
10. Idle Stop and Go (ISG) OFF button....5-44
11. ESC Off button....................................5-29
12. Advanced Lighting Speaker ..............4-149
13. Steering wheel ....................................4-43
14. Tilt and telescopic steering control
lever.....................................................4-44
15. Inner fuse panel ..................................7-63
16. Hood release lever ..............................4-32
17. Seat.......................................................3-2
18. Transaxle shift lever ...................5-14, 5-17

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

2 4

OPS013004N

Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Audio remote control buttons..............4-147
2. Driver’s front air bag .............................3-51
3. Horn......................................................4-45
4. Cruise control button ............................5-38
5. Instrument cluster .................................4-54
6. Lighting control lever.............................4-90
7.Wiper and washer control lever .............4-94
8. Ignition switch or Engine start/stop
button...............................................5-6, 5-9
9. Audio...................................................4-146
10. Hazard warning flasher.........................6-2
11. Climate control system..........4-104, 4-114
12. Front seat warmer/
Seat air ventilation.................4-136, 4-138
13. Power outlet ......................................4-140
14. Center console storage box..............4-132
15. Glove box..........................................4-132
16. Passenger’s front air bag....................3-51
17. Parking brake......................................5-25

❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OPS013003N

2 5

Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ 1.6L GDI

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-34
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-27
3. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-27
4. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-29
5. Radiator cap .....................................7-31
6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-32
7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-44
8. Negative battery terminal..................7-44
9. Fuse box ...........................................7-62
10. Air cleaner.......................................7-36

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OPS073001

2 6

Your vehicle at a glance

■ 2.0L GDI

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OPS073002

2 7

Safety features of your vehicle
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
• Front seat adjustment - Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
• Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
• Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
• Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Air bag advanced supplemental restraint system . . . . . . 3-39
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
• Do not Installing a child restraint on a front
passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
• Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

• Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag . . 3-57
• SRS care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
• Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
• Adding equipment to or modifying your air bagequipped vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Safety features of your vehicle
SEATS
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(Driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)
(5) Headrest

Manual seat

Rear seats
(6) Seatback folding
(7) Headrest

Power seat

OPS033001N

3 2

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Loose
objects
Do not place anything in the driver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere
with the operation of the foot
pedals.

WARNING

- Driver responsibility for
passengers

WARNING - Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on
seat cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an
accident or a sudden stop.

WARNING - Uprighting
seat
Do not press the release lever
on a manual seatback without
holding and controlling the
seatback. The seatback will
spring upright possibly impacting you or other passengers.

1KMN3662

The driver must advise the passenger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
is reclined during an accident,
the occupant's hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt, applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen.

3 3

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss
of control.
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position of
the seatback. Storing items
against a seatback or in any
other way interfering with proper locking of a seatback could
result in serious or fatal injury
in a sudden stop or collision
• Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable control of the your vehicle. A distance of at least 10" from your
chest to the steering wheel is
recommended. Failure to do so
can result in airbag inflation
injuries to the driver.

3 4

WARNING
- Rear seatbacks
Always lock the rear seatback
before driving. Failure to do so
could result in passengers or
objects being thrown forward
injuring vehicle occupants.

WARNING - Unexpected
Seat Movement
After adjusting a manual seat,
always check that it is locked by
shifting your weight to the front
and back. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's
seat could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.

WARNING - Luggage and
Cargo
Do not stack pile or stack luggage or cargo higher than the
seatback in the cargo area. In an
accident the cargo could strike
and injury a passenger. If
objects are large, heavy or must
be piled, they must be secured
in the cargo area.

WARNING
- Seat adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near
the seat adjusting the seat.
Your hand could get caught in
the seat mechanism.
• Use extreme caution when
picking small objects trapped
under the seats or between
the seat and the center console. Your hands might be cut
or injured by the sharp edges
of the seats mechanism.

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat adjustment - manual

Seatback angle

Seat height (for driver’s seat)

Forward and backward

OPS033002

To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.

OPS033003

OPS033004

To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to
lock.)

To change the height of the seat,
push the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the
lever up several times.

3 5

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so you can easily control the steering wheel, pedals and
switches on the instrument panel.

WARNING - Unattended
children
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. Children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them.

CAUTION - Power seat
adjustments
The power seating controls
function by electronic motor.
Excessive operation may cause
damage to the electrical equipment.

CAUTION - Power Seating
Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
damage the power seat motor or
electrical components.

When in operation, the power seat
consumes a large amount of electrical power. To prevent unnecessary
charging system drain, don’t adjust
the power seat longer than necessary while the engine is not running.

3 6

Forward and backward

OPS033005

Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.

Safety features of your vehicle

Seatback angle

Seat height (for driver’s seat)

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)

OPS033006

OPS033007

OPS033008

Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.

Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or press down to
lower the front part of the seat cushion. Pull the rear portion of the control switch up to raise or press down
to lower the rear part of the seat
cushion. Release the switch once the
seat reaches the desired position.

The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the button.

3 7

Safety features of your vehicle

Headrest (for front seat)

For maximum effectiveness in case of
an accident, the headrest should be
adjusted so the middle of the headrest
is at the same height of the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity of most
people's head is similar with the height
of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust the
headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a
cushion that holds the body away from
the seatback is not recommended.
OPS034058N

The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger,
but also helps protect the head and
neck in the event of a rear collision.

3 8

WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose control of the vehicle.

OPS033009

Forward and rearward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted forward to 4 different positions by
pulling the headrest forward to the
desired detent. To adjust the headrest to it’s furthest rearward position,
pull it fully forward to the farthest
position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports
the head and neck.

Safety features of your vehicle

Removal/Reinstall
■ Type A

OPS033010

Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).

OYFH034205

OPS033047L
■ Type B

CAUTION
If you recline the seatback
towards the front with the head
restraint and seat cushion
raised, the head restraint may
come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.
OPS033049L

To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback(2) with the
recline lever or switch(1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
3 9

Safety features of your vehicle

■ Type A

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.

Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after reinstalling and adjusting it properly.

WARNING - Headrest
OPS033048L
■ Type B

OPS033050L

To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Recline the seatback(4) with the
recline lever or switch(3)
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.
3 10

Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to
the head or neck, always make
sure the headrest is locked into
position and adjusted properly
after reinstalling.

Safety features of your vehicle

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

Rear seat adjustment
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.

WARNING - Folded down

OPS033016

The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s
seatbacks.

WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pocket.
An occupant could contact such
objects in a crash. Heavy objects
in the front passenger seatback
could also interfere with the
airbag sensing system.

seatback
Never allow passengers sit on top
of the folded down seatback while
the vehicle is moving.This is not a
proper seating position and no
seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop.

WARNING - Objects
Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This could
allow cargo to slide forward and
cause injury or damage during
sudden stops.

OPS033017

OPS033015

To fold down the rear seatback
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket (if equipped) between
the rear seatback and cushion,
and insert the rear seat belt webbing in the guide to prevent the
seat belt from being damaged.

3 11

Safety features of your vehicle

2. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.

WARNING - Cargo
Do not place heavy objects in
the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and
may hit vehicle occupants in a
frontal collision.

OPS033018

4.Pull on the seatback folding lever,
then fold the seat toward the front
of the vehicle. When you return the
seatback to its upright position,
always be sure it has locked into
position by pushing on the top of
the seatback.
5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward by pulling
on the folding lever.
Pull the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked
in place.
6.Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
3 12

Safety features of your vehicle

Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park) or
the manual transaxle is in R
(Reverse) or 1st, and the parking
brake is securely applied whenever
loading or unloading cargo. Failure to
take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift lever is inadvertently moved to another position.

Headrest

*
*

OPA039053

The rear seat(s) is equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.

For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height as the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head.
Generally, the center of gravity of
most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.

3 13

Safety features of your vehicle

Adjusting the height up and down

Removal and installation

WARNING - Headrest
installation
After installing the headrest,
make sure that it is installed in
the right direction.
A headrest installed reversely
could increase whiplash injury
during rear impact.

OPS033033

OPS033034

To raise the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To remove the headrest :
1. Raise it as far as it can go then
press the release button (1) while
pulling the headrest up (2).

To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).

To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to properly
protect the occupants.

3 14

Safety features of your vehicle

Armrest

OPS033032

To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.

3 15

Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
• For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always
be used whenever the vehicle is
moving. A properly positioned
shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child
restraint system section for further
discussion.

WARNING - Shoulder Belt
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind
your back. An improperly
positioned shoulder belt cannot protect the occupant in a
crash.
• Always wear both the shoulder portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING - Damaged
seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the webbing or hardware is damage as
you can no longer be sure that a
damage seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.

3 16

Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front
of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
lap section of the belt across the
abdominal area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.

Safety features of your vehicle

• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user which
will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat
belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the seat
belt repeatedly while driving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are hard
or can break easily.

WARNING - Seat belt

Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

buckle
Do not allow foreign material
(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
obstruct the seat belt buckle.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.

1GQA2083

The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate pursuant to
the following table when the ignition
switch is in "ON" position.

3 17

Safety features of your vehicle

Conditions
Seat Belt

Vehicle
Speed

Unbuckled

ChimeSound

Light-Blink

6 seconds

None

Below 5 km/h
6 seconds
(3 mph)

None

5 km/h~
10 km/h

6 seconds

Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)

Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)

6 seconds *1

↓

Below 5 km/h
(3 mph)

Stop *

B180A01NF-1
2

*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's
seat belt is buckled, the light will stop
within 6 seconds and chime will stop
immediately.
*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.

3 18

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor

6 seconds

Buckled

Buckled →
Unbuckled

Warning Pattern

To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will
be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Safety features of your vehicle

Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.

Front seat

WARNING - Shoulder belt
positioning
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
OXM039026

Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the 3 positions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
near the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).

B200A02NF

WARNING - Seat belt
replacement
Replace your seat belts after
being in an accident. Failure to
replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protection in the event of
another collision.

WARNING
You should place the lap belt
portion as low as possible and
snugly across your hips, not on
your waist. If the lap belt is located too high on your waist, it may
increase the chance of injury in
the event of a collision. Both
arms should not be under or
over the belt. Rather, one should
be over and the other under, as
shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under
the arm that is near the door.

3 19

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belts - Front passenger and
rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the
installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is
also installed in the front passenger
seat position, it is strongly recommended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER
place any infant restraint system in
the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).

3 20

It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion
of the seat belt is adjusted manually
so that it fits snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a child restraint system” in this section.

✽ NOTICE
Although the combination retractor
provides the same level of protection
for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes,
have the seated passengers use the
emergency locking feature for
improved convenience. The automatic locking function is intended to
facilitate child restraint installation.
To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking
operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract.

Do NOT fold down the left portion of
the rear seat back when the rear
center seat belt is buckled. ALWAYS
UNBUCKLE the rear center seat belt
before folding down the left portion of
the rear seat back. If the rear center
seat belt is buckled when the left portion of the rear seat back is folded
down, distortion and damage to the
top portion of the seat back and seat
belt garnish may result, causing the
seat back to lock into the folded
down position.

Safety features of your vehicle

Stowing the rear seat belt

B210A01NF-1

To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) on the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.

OPS033015
OPS033017

The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the
rear seatback and cushion when not
in use.

Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides will
help keep the belts from being
trapped behind or under the seats.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.

CAUTION - Seat belt
guide
Remove the seat belt from the
guides before using. If you pull
on the seat belt when it is stored
in the guides, it may damage the
guides and/or belt webbing.

3 21

Safety features of your vehicle

3 Point rear center belt

WARNING - Rear center
seat belt
Do not separate mini tongue and
mini buckle even if there is not
an occupant.
If it is separated, It may hit the
rear seat occupants in a collision
or sudden stops.
ORP032074
ORP032073C

To fasten the rear center belt
1.Insert the mini tongue (A) into the
open end of the anchor connector
(C) until an audible “click" is heard,
indicating the latch is locked. Make
sure the belt is not twisted.

3 22

2.Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert
the tongue plate (B) into the open
end of the buckle (D) until an audible “click” is heard, indicating the
latch is locked. Make sure the belt
is not twisted.
When using the rear center seat
belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”
mark must be used.

Safety features of your vehicle

There will be an audible “click” when
the tab locks in the buckle. The seat
belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt is
adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips, if you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and let you move around.
If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will
also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
When using the rear seat center belt,
you must lock all tongue plates and
buckles.

To unfasten the rear center belt

ORP032076K
ORP032075

Press the release button on the
buckle (D) and remove the tongue
plate (B) from the buckle (D).

When you fold the rear seatback
To retract the rear center seatbelt,
insert the tongue plate or similar
small rigid device into the web
release hole (C). Pull up on the seat
belt web (A) and allow the webbing
to retract automatically.

3 23

Safety features of your vehicle

Pre-tensioner seat belt

(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pretensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in certain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal collisions.

OXMA033101

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated, when a frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor
may lock into position. In certain
frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner
will activate and pull the seat belt into
tighter contact against the occupant's body.
3 24

If the system senses excessive tension on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner system activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt.

OPS033036N/Q

The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)

Safety features of your vehicle

Both the driver's and front passenger's seat belt pre-tensioner system
may be activated not only in certain
frontal collision but also in certain
side collision or rollover, if the vehicle
is equipped with a side or curtain air
bag.
Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS
air bag warning light
on the
instrument panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the
ignition switch has been turned to the
ON position, and then it should turn
off.

✽ NOTICE
When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.

WARNING - Skin Irritation
Wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly after an accident in
which the pre-tensioner seat
belts were activated. The fine
dust from the pre-tensioner
activation may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed
for prolonged periods.

If the pre-tensioner seat belt system
are not working properly, this warning light will illuminate even if there is
no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned ON, or if it remains
illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt
and SRS air bag system as soon as
possible.

3 25

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Hot pretensioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism
fires during a collision the pretensioner becomes hot and can
burn you.
Pre-tensioners are designed to operate only one time. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must be
replaced. If the pre-tensioner must
be replaced, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.

3 26

Seat belt precautions

✽ NOTICE

Infant or small child
Child and/or infant seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. For more information
about the use of these restraints,
refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.

Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat
by a child restraint system that
meets the requirements of the safety
standards of your country. Before
buying any child restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets safety standards of
your country. The restraint must be
appropriate for your child's height
and weight. Check the label on the
child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in
this chapter.

Safety features of your vehicle

Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always
occupy the rear seat and use the
available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened and
snugged on the hips and as low as
possible. Check if the belt fits periodically. A child's squirming could put
the belt out of position. Children are
given the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained
by a proper restraint system in the
rear seat. If a larger child (over age
12) must be seated in the front seat,
the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position.
Children age 12 and under should be
restrained securely in the rear seat.
NEVER place a child age 12 and
under in the front seat. NEVER place
a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.

WARNING

Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE.

- Small children
Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate child restraint system. If the shoulder belt comes
in contact with your child's neck
or face your child is too small to
ride in the vehicle. In a crash the
seat belt will inflict injury to your
child's neck, throat and face.

WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.

3 27

Safety features of your vehicle

Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an accident.

3 28

Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve maximum effectiveness of
the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the vehicle is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front and rear
seats are in a reclined position.

Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.

WARNING - Pinched
seat belt
Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A
caught
or
pinched
webbing/buckle may become
damaged and could fail during a
collision or sudden stop.

Safety features of your vehicle

Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident. This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an
authorized Kia dealer.

3 29

Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the vehicle should
sit in the rear seat and must always
be properly restrained to minimize
the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Larger children not in
a child restraint should use one of
the seat belts provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt,
or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH
anchors (if equipped).

3 30

Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your vehicle seat and seat
belts, and fits your child.
Follow all the instructions provided
by the manufacturer when installing
the child restraint system.

WARNING - Restraint
location
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat. A child riding in the front
passenger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating airbag.

A child restraint system can become
very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day. Be sure to check the
seat cover, buckles and latches
before placing a child in the restraint
system.
When the child restraint system is
not in use, store it in the luggage
area or fasten it with a seat belt so
that it will not be thrown forward in
case of a sudden stop or an accident.

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING
- Holding children
Never hold a child in your arms
or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child
from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint
system which is appropriate for
your child's height and weight.

WARNING - Seat belt use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
to the occupants.
After an accident, have an authorized Kia dealer check the child
restraint system, seat belt, tether
anchor and lower anchor.

Using a child restraint system
Rearward-facing child restraint system

CRS09
Forward-facing child restraint system

WARNING - Unattended
Children
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle. The car can heat up
very quickly, resulting in injuries
to the child in the vehicle.
OUN026150

For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required. The child seat or infant seat
should be of appropriate size for the
child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
3 31

Safety features of your vehicle

For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat,
because of the danger an inflating
passenger-side air bag could impact
the rear-facing child restraint and kill
the child.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency lock
mode), you must manually change
these seat belts to the auto lock
mode to secure a child restraint.
If the seat belt does not operate as
described in this section, have the
system checked immediately by your
authorized Kia dealer.

3 32

WARNING - Child seat
installation
• Always follow the instructions
provided by the child restraint
system manufacturer. Child
restraint system manufacturers know their products best.
• Failure to observe this manual's instructions regarding
child restraint system and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
result in the improper installation of the child restraint system which may reduce the
protection to your child in a
crash or a sudden stop.
• If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a
child seat (as described in the
child seat system manual), the
headrest of the respective
seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

Placing a passenger seat belt
into the auto lock mode

E2MS103005

The auto lock mode will help prevent
the normal movement of the child in
the vehicle from causing the seat belt
to loosen and compromise the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following
procedure.

Safety features of your vehicle

OEN036101

OEN036102

OEN036103

To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child
restraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “Auto Lock”
mode. If no distinct sound is
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

3 33

Safety features of your vehicle

OEN036104

5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode by
attempting to pull more of the seat
belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode.

3 34

The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully. Therefore, the preceding seven steps must be followed
each time a child restraint is
installed.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.

WARNING - Auto lock
mode
Set the retractor to Automatic
Lock mode when installing any
child restraint system. If the
retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking mode, the child
restraint can move when your
vehicle turns or stops suddenly.
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the “Auto Lock” mode
to the emergency lock mode for
normal adult usage.

Safety features of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint seat
with tether anchor system

WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load
caused by multiple seats may
cause the tethers or anchorage
points to break.

OXM039034N

OPS033019

Child restraint hook holders are
located on the back of the rear seatbacks.
This symbol indicates the
position of the tether anchor.

1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback. In case of interference
between the child restraint seat
and the headrest remove the particular head restraint for better fitment of the child restraint seat.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint
hook holder and tighten to secure
the child restraint seat.

3 35

Safety features of your vehicle

Check that the child restraint system
is secure by pushing and pulling it in
different directions. Incorrectly fitted
child restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or serious
injury.

Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system

Lower Anchor
Position Indicator

Lower Anchor
OXM039060N

OPS034059N

Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as LATCH or LATCH-compatible child restraint seats. LATCH
stands for "Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children". These seats
include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two
LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.

3 36

Child restraint symbols are located
on the left and right 2nd row seat
backs to indicate the position of the
lower anchors for child restraints.

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Unused rear
seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure to
do so may result in child strangulation.

Install the child restraint seat fully
rearward against the seatback with
the seatback reclined two positions
from the most upright latched position.

OXM039036N

LATCH anchors have been provided
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors
are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their
locations are shown in the illustration. There is no LATCH anchor provided for the center rear seating
position.
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the 2nd row seat left and
right outboard seating positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or
LATCH-compatible attachments.

3 37

Safety features of your vehicle

Once you have installed the LATCH
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and
tether anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt
the seat from side to side. Also try to
tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.

3 38

WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
Never attempt to attach a
LATCH equipped seat in the
center seating position. LATCH
lower anchors are only to be
used with the left and right rear
outboard seating positions. You
may damage the anchors or the
anchors may fail and break in a
collision.

Safety features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
Side air bag
Curtain air bag

Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and severity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OAM032026

3 39

Safety features of your vehicle

How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START position.
• The appropriate air bags inflate
instantly in the event of a serious
frontal collision or side collision in
order to help protect the occupants
from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision and its direction. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/ inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle
hits in the collision. The determining factors are not limited to those
mentioned above.

3 40

• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in serious
side collisions, side and/or curtain
air bags will inflate if the sensing
system detects a rollover.
• When a rollover is detected, curtain air bags will remain inflated
longer to help provide protection
from ejection, especially when
used in conjunction with the seat
belts.

• In order to help provide protection,
the air bags must inflate rapidly.
The speed of the air bag inflation is
a consequence of extremely short
time in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of the air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel or passenger air
bag can cause fatal injuries,
especially if the occupant is
positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel or passenger
air bag.

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING
- Airbag inflation
Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable control of your vehicle. A distance
of at least 10" from your chest
to the steering wheel is recommended. Failure to do so can
result in airbag inflation injuries
to the driver.

Noise and smoke
When inflated, the air bags make a
loud noise and leave smoke and
powder in the air inside the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the
ignition of the air bag inflator. After
the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due
to the contact of your chest with both
the seat belt and the air bag, as well
as from breathing the smoke and
powder. Open your doors and/or
windows as soon as possible after
impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are nontoxic, it may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.

WARNING
- Hot components
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after airbag inflation. The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.

3 41

Safety features of your vehicle

Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger’s seat.

WARNING - Air bag

Air bag warning light

deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or curtain air bags could impact the
child.
W7-147
1JBH3051

Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it could cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.

3 42

The purpose of air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert
you of a potential problem with your
air bag system, which could include
your side and/or curtain air bags
used for rollover protection.

Safety features of your vehicle

When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the warning light should illuminate for approximately 6 seconds,
then go off. Have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealership if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.

SRS components and functions
,

,
OPS034060N/Q

The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors

10. PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s seat
only)
11. Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
14. Side pressure impact sensor
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.

3 43

Safety features of your vehicle

W7-147

If the air bag warning light illuminated for more than, 6 seconds after the
ignition is turned on, or of it illuminates during vehicle operation, an
SRS component may not be functioning properly and you should have
your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

3 44

If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
in the air bag system. Have an
authorized Kia dealer inspect the air
bag system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.

Driver’s front air bag (1)

B240B01L

The front air bag modules are located both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.

Safety features of your vehicle

Driver’s front air bag (2)

Driver’s front air bag (3)

Passenger’s front air bag

B240B02L

B240B03L

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility
and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.

B240B05L

WARNING
- Air bag obstructions
Do not install or place any
accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehicle. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles if the air
bag deploys.

3 45

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Flying
objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
If an air bag deploys, there may be a
loud noise followed by a fine dust
released in the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous - the air bags are packed in
this fine powder. The dust generated
during air bag deployment may
cause skin or eye irritation as well as
aggravate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly with lukewarm water and
a mild soap after an accident in
which the air bags were deployed.

3 46

The SRS can function only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate, or continuously
remains on after illuminating for
about 6 seconds when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position,
or after the engine is started, comes
on while driving, the SRS is not
working properly. If this occurs, have
your vehicle immediately inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽ NOTICE
Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the ignition switch.
Never remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Failure
to observe this warning will cause
the SRS air bag warning light to illuminate.

Occupant Detection System
(ODS)

OPS033020

Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not. Only the front passenger front
air bag is controlled by the Occupant
Detection System.
Do not put anything in front of the
passenger air bag
indicator.

Safety features of your vehicle

Main components of the occupant detection system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• An electronic system which determines whether the passenger air
bag systems should be activated
or deactivated.
• A indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warning light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person that the system
determines to be of appropriate size,
and he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt on,
legs comfortably extended and their
feet on the floor), the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will turn off
and the front passenger's air bag will
be able to inflate, if necessary, in
frontal crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and
restrained properly (sitting upright
with the seat in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and wearing the
safety belt properly) for the most
effective protection by the air bag and
the safety belt.

• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
(7) Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear
or hip protection wear.
(8) Put on the seat an additional thick
cushion.

3 47

Safety features of your vehicle

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection
system
Condition detected by the
occupant detection
system
1. Adult or child*1
2. Child restraint system*2
3. Unoccupied
4. There is a malfunction
in the system

Indicator/Warning light

Devices

"PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator
light

SRS warning light

Off

Activated

On
On

Off
Off

Deactivated

Off

Activated

Front passenger
air bag

Deactivated

*1 : The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person's size to determine whether the
air bag should deploy. It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS,
thus allowing the air bag to deploy. To maximize safety, do not allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat.
*2 : Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

3 48

✽ NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blanket, front seat cover or after market
seat heater to the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.

WARNING - ODS System
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the Occupant
Detection System and may
result in the deactivation of the
front passenger airbag. It is
important for the driver to
instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as
contained in this manual.
(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

OVQ036013N

1KMN3663

1KMN3665

- Never put a heavy load or an
active electronic device on
the front passenger seat or
seatback pocket.

- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.

- Never place feet on the dashboard.

OVQ036014N

1KMN3662

1KMN3664

- Never place feet on the front
passenger seatback.

- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.

- Never lean on the door or center console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
3 49

Safety features of your vehicle

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.

Proper position

WARNING - “AIR BAG

B990A01O

When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag.

3 50

OFF” light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated, because
the air bag will not deploy in the
event of a crash. The driver
must instruct the passenger to
reposition himself in the seat.
Failure to properly position
yourself may lead to air bag
deactivation resulting in air bag
non-deployment in a collision. If
the PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator remains illuminated after the passenger repositions themselves properly and
the car is restarted, it is recommended that passenger move to
the rear seat because the passenger's front air bag will not
deploy.

✽ NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after
the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the occupant detection sensor will then classify the front passenger after several
more seconds.

Safety features of your vehicle

Any child age 12 and under should
ride in the rear seat. Children too
large for child restraints should use
the available lap/shoulder belts. No
matter what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when restrained in
the rear seat.

If the occupant detection system is
not working properly, the SRS air
bag warning light on the instrument
panel will illuminate because the
passenger's front air bag is connected with the occupant detection system. If there is a malfunction of the
occupant detection system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
will not illuminate and the passenger's front air bag will inflate in frontal
impact crashes even if there is no
occupant in the front passenger's
seat

Driver's and passenger's front
air bag
Driver’s front air bag

OPS033021
Passenger’s front air bag

OPS033022

Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passenger seating position.
3 51

Safety features of your vehicle

The indication of the system's presence are the letters "AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover
on the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above
the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt usage and impact severity.

3 52

The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger's seat belts are fastened.

WARNING- Replacement /
modifications
The front passenger seat, dashboard or door should not be
replaced except by an authorized
Kia dealer using original Kia parts
designed for this vehicle and
model. Any other such replacement or modification could
adversely affect the operation of
the occupant detection system
and your advanced air bags.

These sensors provide the ability to
control the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fastened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instrument panel in low speed collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.

CAUTION - Seat Track
Sensor
Do not place any objects underneath the front seats as they
could damage the seat track
position sensor or interfere with
the occupant detection system.

According to the impact severity and
seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS
Control Module) controls the air bag
inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.

Safety features of your vehicle

Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat. The occupant detection system detects the
presence of a passenger in the front
passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under certain conditions. For more detail, see
"Occupant detection system" in this
section.

WARNING - Modification
Modification to the seat structure can cause the air bag to
deploy at a different level than
should be provided.

Manufacturers are required by government regulations to provide a
contact point concerning modifications to the vehicle for persons with
disabilities, which modifications may
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag
system. However, Kia does not
endorse nor will it support any
changes to any part or structure of
the vehicle that could affect the
advanced air bag system, including
the occupant detection system.

Advanced air bags are combined
with pre-tensioner seat belts to help
provide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes. Front air bags
are not intended to deploy in collisions in which sufficient protection
can be provided by the pre-tensioner
seat belt.

WARNING - Replacement /
Modifications
The front passenger seat, dashboard or door should not be
replaced except by an authorized
Kia dealer using original Kia parts
designed for this vehicle and
model. Any other such replacement or modification could
adversely affect the operation of
the occupant detection system
and your advanced air bags.

3 53

Safety features of your vehicle

Side air bag

Rear impact

WARNING - SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.

OEP036096N
Side impact

Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. In addition, front air
bags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold.

OPS033023

OVQ036018N
Rollover

OPS033037

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1VQA2091

3 54

Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.

Safety features of your vehicle

• The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
• The side and/or curtain air bags do
not only deploy on the side of the
impact but also on the opposite
side.
• The side and/or curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle will deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
• The side air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or
rollover situations.

WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
Avoid impact to the side impact
airbag sensor when the ignition
switch is ON to prevent unexpected deployment of the side
impact air bag.

The side air bag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's seat
belt systems and is not a substitute
for them. Therefore your seat belts
must be worn at all times while the
vehicle is in mention.
For best protection from the side air
bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air bag,
both front seat occupants should sit
in an upright position with the seat
belt properly fastened. The driver's
hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passenger's arms and
hands should be placed on their
laps.

WARNING - Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the
side or near the side impact air
bag as this may affect the
deployment of the side air bags.
If seat or seat cover is damaged,
have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.
Inform the dealer that your vehicle is
equipped with side air bags and an
occupant detection system.

WARNING - Flying
objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.

3 55

Safety features of your vehicle

Curtain air bag

OPS033024

OPS033038

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.

3 56

They are designed to help protect
occupants in certain side impacts
and to help prevent them from ejecting out of the vehicle as a result of a
rollover, especially when the seatbelts are also in use.
• The curtain air bags are designed
to deploy during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
point of impact.
• The side and/or curtain air bags
do not only deploy on the side of
the impact but also on the opposite
side.
• Also, the curtain air bags on both
sides of the vehicle will deploy in
certain rollover situations.
• The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side
impact or rollover situations.
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies against the
doors, put their arms on the doors,
stretch their arms out of the window
or place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side
impact and/or curtain air bags.

✽ NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any components of the side and curtain air
bag system. This should only be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.

Safety features of your vehicle

Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

OPS033025N/OPS033026/OPS033027/OPS033028/OPS033029

(1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Side pressure sensor
3 57

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING
- Air bag sensors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious personal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should.
Therefore, do not try to perform maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.

3 58

• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the front
bumper, front end module, body or
front doors and/or B pillar where
side collision sensors are installed.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Installing bumper guards (or side
step or running board) or replacing
a bumper (or front door module)
with non-genuine parts may
adversely affect your vehicle’s collision and air bag deployment performance.

Air bag inflation conditions

1VQA2084

Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.

Safety features of your vehicle

OVQ036018N

OPS033039

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Side air/or curtain air bags
Side air bags (side and/or curtain air
bags) are designed to inflate when an
impact is detected by side collision
sensors depending on the strength,
speed or angles of impact resulting
from a side impact collision.

Also, the side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when a rollover is
detected by a rollover sensor.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. Side
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in certain side impact collisions. They may inflate in other type
of collisions where a side force is
detected by the sensors. Side air bag
and/or curtain air bags may also
inflate where rollover sensors indicate the possibility of a rollover
occurring (even if none actually
occurs) or in other situations, incluiding when the vehicle is tilted while
being towed. Even where side and/or
curtain air bags would not provide
impact protection in a rollover, however, they will deploy to prevent ejection of occupants, especially those
who are restrained with seat belts.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.

3 59

Safety features of your vehicle

Air bag non-inflation conditions

1VQA2086

• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions.

3 60

OUN036087

OVQ036018N

• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
would not provide additional occupant protection.

Safety features of your vehicle

1VQA2089

1VQA2090

1VQA2091

• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in
a direction where the air bags
would not be able to provide any
additional benefit, and thus the
sensors may not deploy any air
bags.

• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to “ride” under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly
reduced by such “under-ride” collisions.

• Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because front
airbag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

3 61

Safety features of your vehicle

SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and so there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on,
have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

1VQA2092

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sensors.

3 62

Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger’s panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized Kia dealer. Improper
handling of the SRS system may
result in serious personal injury.

For cleaning the air bag pad covers,
use only a soft, dry cloth or one
which has been moistened with plain
water. Solvents or cleaners could
adversely affect the air bag covers
and proper deployment of the system.
If components of the air bag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. An
authorized Kia dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Tampering
with SRS
Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in the
accidental inflation of the air
bags or by rendering the SRS
inoperative.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped
vehicle

Air bag warning label

If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.

OAM039041

WARNING - Towing
Vehicle
Always have the ignition off
when your vehicle is being
towed. The side air bags may
inflate if the vehicle is tilted
such as when being towed
because of the rollover sensors
in the vehicle.
OPS033030

Air bag warning labels, some
required by the Canada Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS),
are attached to the sunvisor to alert
the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.
3 63

Features of your vehicle
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-19
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-20
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

• Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• FLEX steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
• Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
• Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
• Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
• Interior lamp AUTO cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Portable lamp usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
• Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

• Headlamp escort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

• Checking the amount of air conditioner
refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-113

Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Checking the amount of air conditioner
refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Luggage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

• Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142

Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Mounting bracket for roof carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Audio remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Aux, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
• Speaker lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149

Features of your vehicle
KEY
Record your key number
The key code number is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.

• To unfold the key, press the release
button (1) then the key will unfold
automatically. To fold the key, fold
the key manually while pressing
the release button (1).

Key operations
■ Type A

CAUTION
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
OED036001A
■ Type B

WARNING - Aftermarket

OXMA043331

• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.

4 4

key
Use only Kia original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used,
the ignition switch may not
return to ON after START. If this
happens, the starter will continue to operate causing damage
to the starter motor and possible fire due to excessive current
in the wiring.

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Ignition

Door Lock (1)

Door Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button(2).
2. The driver's door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
tailgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.

key(smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised children. Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with a manual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition switch or
press the start button. The key
would enable children to operate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
result in serious bodily injury or
death.

✽ NOTICE
OXMA043317

1. Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. All doors and tailgate will lock. The
hazard warning lights will blink
once.
4. If the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
horn will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside
or pulling the outside door handle.

You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.

4 5

Features of your vehicle

Tailgate unlock (3)
The tailgate is unlocked if the button
is pressed for more than 1 second.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will be
locked automatically.
Panic (4)
The horn sounds and hazard warning lights flash for about 30 seconds
if this button is pressed for more than
1 second. To stop the horn and lights,
press any button except the trunk
button on the transmitter.

4 6

Transmitter precautions

✽ NOTICE
• The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur:
- The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
- You exceed the operating distance limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio substation or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation of
the transmitter.
• When the transmitter does not
work correctly, open and close the
door with the ignition key. If you
have a problem with the transmitter, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving
emails. Avoid placing the transmitter and your mobile phone in the
same pants or jacket pocket and
always try to maintain an adequate
distance between the two devices.

CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not function properly.

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Battery replacement

If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

OYDDCO2005

The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium
battery which will normally last for
several years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
is positioned battery.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.

For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized Kia dealer for transmitter
reprogramming.
• The transmitter is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If you
are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
•
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and may cause
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.

4 7

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION - Transmitter
damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the
keyless entry system transmitter to heat or sunlight.

IC WARNING
This device complies with
Industry
Canada
licenceexempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.

4 8

Immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
it checks and determines and verifies
if the ignition key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.

To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a customer
unique password and should be kept
confidential. Do not leave this number anywhere in your vehicle.

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent
the engine from being started.

✽ NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.

CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.

This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not approved by
the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

4 9

Features of your vehicle

Limp home (override) procedure
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON position, if the immobilizer
indicator (
) goes off after blinking 5 times, your transponder
equipped in the ignition key is out of
order. You cannot start the engine
without the limp home procedure. To
start the engine, you have to input
your password by using the ignition
switch. Your password is only available from an authorized Kia dealership. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.
The following procedure is how to
input your password of “2345” as an
example.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position. The immobilizer indicator
(
) will blink 5 times and go off
indicating the beginning of the limp
home procedure.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position.

4 10

3. To enter the first digit (in this
example “2”), turn the ignition
switch to the ON and ACC position
twice. Perform the same procedure for the next digits between 3
seconds and 10 seconds (for
example, for “3”, turn the ignition
ON and ACC 3 times).
4. If all of the digits have been input
successfully, you have to start the
engine within 30 seconds. If you
attempt to start the engine after 30
seconds, the engine will not start
and you will have to input your
password again.
After performing the limp home procedure, you have to see an authorized Kia dealer immediately to
inspect and repair your ignition key
or immobilizer system.

Features of your vehicle
SMART KEY
Record your key number
The key code number is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.

With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door (and Tailgate) and start
the engine.
Refer to the following for more
details.

Smart key function

OXMA043316

To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button(1) and
remove the mechanical key (2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.

4 11

Features of your vehicle

Door Lock

OPS043010

Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
3. Press the button of the outside
door handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.

4 12

• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7~1m
(28~40 in. ) from the outside door
handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds if any of following
occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the tailgate is
open.

OXMA043316/Q

Using the button on the smart key
1 Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.

Features of your vehicle

Unlocking
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the button of the driver's
outside door handle.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
4. Press the button twice within 4
seconds and all doors and the tailgate will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.

• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7~1m
(28~40 in. ) from the outside door
handle.
• When the smart key is recognized
in the area of 0.7~1m (28~40 in.)
from the front outside door handle,
other people can also open the
doors.
• After unlocking the driver’s door or
all doors, the door(s) will lock automatically unless the door is
opened.

Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the unlock button(2) of the
smart key.
2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
the tailgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.

✽ NOTICE
After pressing the button, the doors
will lock automatically unless any
door is opened within 30 seconds.

✽ NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.

4 13

Features of your vehicle

Tailgate unlocking
Using the tailgate handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the tailgate handle button.
3. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock
automatically.
If you are within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.)
from the outside tailgate handle, with
your smart key in possession, the
tailgate will unlock and open when
you press the tailgate handle switch.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the tailgate unlock button(3)
for more than 1 second.
2. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.

4 14

Panic
1. Press the panic button(4) for more
than 1 second.
2. The horn sounds and hazard
warning light flash for about 30
seconds.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed information refer to the “Engine start/stop
button” in chapter 5.

Loss of the smart key
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle.
If you happen to lose your smart key,
you will not be able to start the
engine. You should immediately take
the vehicle and remaining key to your
authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehicle, if necessary) to protect it from
potential theft.

Features of your vehicle

Smart key precautions
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key and contact
an authorized Kia dealer.

• If the smart key is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart
phone, the signal from the smart
key could be blocked by normal
operation of your cell phone or
smart phone. This is especially
important when the phone is active
such as making a call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing
the smart key and your cell phone
or smart phone in the same pants
or jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two
devices.

CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not function properly.

✽ NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

4 15

Features of your vehicle

Smart key immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the
smart key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever you turn the engine start/stop
button to the ON position by pressing
the button while carrying the smart
key, it checks and determines and
verifies if the smart key is valid or not.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.

4 16

To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position by pressing the button while carrying the smart key.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobilizer
system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a customer
unique password and should be kept
confidential. Do not leave this number anywhere in your vehicle.

✽ NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
Do not put metal accessories near
the smart key.
The engine may not start because
the metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from transmitting normally.

✽ NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.

CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.

✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.

Battery replacement

OPS043002

A smart key battery should last for
several years, but if the smart key is
not working properly, try replacing
the battery with a new one. If you are
unsure how to use your smart key or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Pry open the rear cover.
3. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.

4 17

Features of your vehicle

4. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
• The smart key is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the smart key,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
•
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.

4 18

CAUTION - Smart key
damage
Do not drop, get wet or expose
the smart key to heat or sunlight, or it will be damaged.

Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
.Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
■ Type A

■ Type B

Lock

Lock
Unlock

Unlock

OPS043011

• Turn the key clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
• If you lock the driver's door with a
key
- all vehicle doors will lock automatically. (for normal key)
- only the driver's door will lock. (for
folding key, smart key)

• From the driver's door
- turn the key to the left once to
unlock the door and once more
within 4 seconds to unlock all
doors. (for normal key).
- turn the key to the left once to
unlock the driver's door. (for folding key, smart key.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure the doors
are closed securely.

✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.

4 19

Features of your vehicle

Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button

OPS043012

• To lock a door without the key,
push the inside door lock button (1)
or central door lock switch (2) to
the “Lock” position and close the
door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle
doors will lock automatically.

✽ NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.

4 20

Lock
Unlock

OPS043013

• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the driver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button will
unlock and the door will open. (if
equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened.

Features of your vehicle

If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from outside.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the tailgate.

With central door lock switch
Driver’s door

• When pressing the rear portion (2)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened, the
doors will not lock even though the
front portion (1) of the central door
lock switch is pressed.

OPS043014
Passenger’s door

OPS043015

Operate by pressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pressing the front portion (1)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
lock.

4 21

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Doors
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the
door.

WARNING
- Unattended children/animals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle.

4 22

Impact sensing door unlock
system

Speed sensing door lock system (if equipped)

In the event of air bag deployment
resulting from a vehicle impact, all
doors will automatically unlock.

All doors will be automatically locked
after the vehicle speed exceeds 15
km/h (9.3 mph). And all doors will be
automatically unlocked when you
turn the engine off or when you
remove the ignition key.

Auto door lock/unlock feature
(if equipped)
• All doors will automatically lock
when the transaxle shift lever is
shifted out of P(Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the transaxle shift lever is
shifted into P (Park).

✽ NOTICE
You can select some auto door
lock/unlock features in “User
Settings” as follows;
• Speed sensing auto door lock
• Auto door unlock when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch or engine is turned off.
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting
the shift lever out of P(Park) or
into P(Park).
For more information, refer to
“User Settings” in this chapter.

Features of your vehicle

Child-protector rear door lock

3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle.
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle (1)
until the rear door child safety lock is
unlocked.

WARNING - Rear door
OPS043016

The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located
on the rear edge of the door to the
lock ( ) position. When the child
safety lock is in the lock position, the
rear door will not open even when
the inner door handle is pulled.

locks
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
vehicle. If a child accidently
opens the rear doors while the
vehicle is motion, he can fall out.

4 23

Features of your vehicle
TAILGATE
✽ NOTICE

Opening the tailgate

Closing the tailgate

In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening
the tailgate.

CAUTION - Tailgate lift
OPS043017

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the key, transmitter
(or smart key) or central door lock
switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be
opened by pressing the handle
switch and then pulling the handle
up.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the
tailgate unlock button on the smart
key is pressed (if equipped). Once
the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate is locked automatically.
4 24

Make certain that you close the
tailgate before driving your
vehicle. Possible damage may
occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if
the tailgate is not closed prior to
driving.

OPS043018

To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure
that the tailgate is securely latched.
Make sure your hands, feet and
other parts of your body are safely
out of the way before closing the tailgate.

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION - Exhaust
fumes
Driving with the tailgate open is
not
advisable.
Dangerous
exhaust fumes can enter the
passenger compartment. If you
must drive with the tailgate
opened, keep the air vents and
all windows open so that additional outside air can enter.

WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints
are
available.
Occupants should always be
properly restrained.

Emergency tailgate safety
release

WARNING
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the cargo area of the
vehicle at any time. The cargo
area is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use with
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.

OPS043019

Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency tailgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the
tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the cargo area, the
tailgate can be opened by pushing
the release lever and pushing open
the tailgate.

4 25

Features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down
(7) Power window lock switch
In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.

OPS043020

4 26

Features of your vehicle

Power windows

✽ NOTICE

The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door's window. The driver has a power window
lock button which can block the operation of the rear passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after
the ignition key is removed or turned
to the ACC or LOCK position.
However, if the front doors are
opened, the power windows cannot
be operated even within the 30 second period.

While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.

Window opening and closing

OPS043021

The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).

4 27

Features of your vehicle

Auto down window (if equipped)

Auto up/down window
(if equipped)

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the driver’s window and
continue pulling up the driver’s
power window switch for at least 1
second after the window is completely closed.

OPS043203

Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
driver’s window even when the
switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the
window is in operation, momentarily
pull up the switch to the opposite
direction of the window movement.

4 28

OPS043022

Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely
lowers or raises the window even
when the switch is released. To stop
the window at the desired position
while the window is in operation, pull
up or press down and release the
switch.
If the power window does not operate normally, the automatic power
window system must be reset as follows:

Features of your vehicle

OUN026013

Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.)
to allow the object to be cleared.
The distance may vary based on the
size or position of the window. If the
window detects the resistance while
the power window switch is pulled up
continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower
approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.).

And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window reversal will not operate.
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when
the “auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway
position on the power window switch.

WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 0.16 in. (4
mm) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.

4 29

Features of your vehicle

Power window lock button

OPS043023

• The driver can disable the power
window switches on the passenger
doors by pressing the power window lock button located on the driver’s door to the LOCK position
(pressed).

4 30

• When the power window lock
switch is pressed :
- The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
- The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's
power window.
- The rear passenger's control cannot operate the rear passenger's
power window.

CAUTION
- Opening /closing Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.

Features of your vehicle

WARNING
- Power windows
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the power window lock switch
(on the driver's door) in the
LOCK (pressed) position.
Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the way
before closing a window.

4 31

Features of your vehicle
HOOD
Opening the hood

Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in the engine compartment must be correctly
installed.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.

OPS043025
OPS043024

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P (Park) position for
automatic transaxle and to the 1st
(First) gear or R (Reverse) for manual transaxle, and setting the parking
brake.

4 32

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, pull the secondary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will completely
rise by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.

WARNING
Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are
removed from the hood opening. Closing the hood with an
obstruction present in the hood
opening may result in severe
personal injury.

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Fire risk
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.

WARNING - Unsecured
engine hood
Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an
accident.
When you check the engine compartment, Take caution to avoid contacting your head with the safety
hook which is located inside of the
hood.

4 33

Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
Opening the fuel filler lid

Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it “clicks” once. This indicates
that the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
in lightly making sure that it is
securely closed.

✽ NOTICE
OPS043027
OPS043026

The fuel filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling up
the fuel filler lid opener.
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.

4 34

1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the
fuel filler lid opener button.
3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel
filler cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.

There may be an intermittent noise
near the refueling hole while the
engine is idling if the fuel cap is not
closed securely. This occurs normally with the OBD system.

✽ NOTICE
When refueling fully at an up hill,
the fuel gauge may not point to the F
position.
It is not a malfunction. If you move
your vehicle to a level ground, the fuel
gauge will move to the full position.

Features of your vehicle

Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.

✽ NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks once,
otherwise the fuel cap open warning
indicator
light will illuminate

WARNING
- Fire/explosion risk
Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facility. Failure to follow all warnings
will result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death
due to fire or explosion.

WARNING
- Static electricity
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another
metal part of the vehicle, a safe
distance away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle, or other gas
source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or
fabric (polyester, satin, nylon,
etc.) capable of producing static
electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors
resulting in rapid burning. If you
must reenter the vehicle, you
should once again eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle,
away from the fuel filler neck,
nozzle or other gasoline source.

WARNING - Portable fuel
container
When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure
to place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling
has begun, contact with the
vehicle should be maintained
until the filling is complete. Use
only approved portable plastic
fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.

4 35

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Cell phone
fires
Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current
and/or electronic interference
from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire.

WARNING - Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.

4 36

WARNING - Refueling &
Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and
filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.

Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the “Fuel requirements”
suggested in chapter 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine Kia cap or
the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control system.

CAUTION - Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.

Features of your vehicle
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• After a vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.

OPS043028

If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof glass control lever located on the overhead
console (1).

CAUTION
- Sunroof control

✽ NOTICE
The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in
the slide position but can be slid
while in a tilt position.

WARNING - Roof cargo
Do not operate the sun roof
while using the roof rack to
transport cargo. This may cause
the cargo to come loose and
distract the driver.

Do not continue to pull or push
the sunroof glass control lever
after the sunroof is fully
opened, closed, or tilted.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.

The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.

4 37

Features of your vehicle

Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)

When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof glass control
lever backward, the sunroof glass will
slide all the way open. To stop the
sunroof glass movement at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.

Sliding the sunroof

OPS043029
OPS043120

If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine)
when the sunroof is not fully closed,
the warning chime will sound for a
few seconds and a message will
appear on the LCD display or warning indicator will illuminate.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.

4 38

When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, both the sunshade and
sunroof glass will slide all the way
open. To stop the sunroof movement
at any point, pull or push the sunroof
glass control lever momentarily.

To close the sunroof glass pull (or
push) the sunroof glass control lever
downward (or forward).
• Type A
When you push the sunroof glass
control lever forward or pull it
downward, the sunshade will be
closed halfway and glass will be
closed at the same time. And then
sunshade will be fully closed finally.
• Type B
When you push the sunroof glass
control lever forward or pull it
downward while the sunshade
opened, the glass will be closed.

Features of your vehicle

Automatic reversal

Tilting the sunroof

OXM049029

OPS043030

If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof is closing
automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.

Before opening or closing the sunroof, open the sunshade (refer to the
following page for instructions on
how to use the sunshade).
To tilt up the sunroof
- Push the sunroof glass control
lever upward.
❈ When you push the sunroof glass
control lever upward while the
sunshade closed, the sunshade
will be opened halfway and then
glass will be tilt up.

To tilt down (or close) the sunroof
- Push the sunroof glass control
lever forward or pull it downward
• Type A
When you push the sunroof glass
control lever forward or pull it
downward while the sunshade
opened, the sunshade will be
closed halfway and then glass will
be tilt down and then sunshade will
be fully closed finally.
• Type B
When you push the sunroof glass
control lever forward or pull it
downward while the sunshade
opened, the glass will be tilt down.
Make sure your hands and head are
safely out of the way before closing a
sunroof.

4 39

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Panoramic
sunroof
Your panoramic sunroof is
made of glass which can break
if impacted with sufficient force.
If your sunroof breaks while you
are driving your vehicle, remain
calm, safely pull your vehicle
out of traffic and park your vehicle in a safe location where you
can call for assistance.

CAUTION
- Sunroof motor damage

Sunshade

• Periodically remove any dirt
that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is
below freezing or when the
sunroof is covered with snow
or ice, the glass or the motor
could be damaged.
OPS043031

WARNING - Sunroof
Operation
When closing the sunroof, make
sure there are no body parts in
the movement range of the sliding roof. Parts of the body could
become trapped or crushed.

4 40

To open the sunshade
Press the sunshade open button (1).
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momentarily.

Features of your vehicle

To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed
- Press the sunshade close button (2).
❈ When you press the sunshade
close button(2) with the sunroof
glass opened
• Type A
The sunshade will be closed
halfway.
• Type B
The sunshade will be closed
halfway, then sunroof glass will be
closed and then sunshade will be
fully closed finally.
- Push the sunroof control lever forward or pull it down.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momentarily.

✽ NOTICE

Resetting the sunroof

Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as
material characteristic are normal.

Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, you must
reset your sunroof system as follows:

CAUTION
- Automatic sunroof shade
• Do not pull or push the sunshade by hand as such action
may damage the sunshade or
cause it to malfunction.
• Close the sunroof when driving in dusty environments.
Dust may cause a malfunction
of the vehicle system.

1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2.Close the sunshade and sunroof
completely if opened.
3.Release the sunroof control lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close (about
10 seconds) until the sunroof moves
a little. Then, release the lever.

4 41

Features of your vehicle

5.Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close, until
the sunroof operates as follows
again:
The sunshade and sunroof glass
slide open → The sunroof glass
slide close → The sunshade close
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system has been reset.

✽ NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it
may not work properly.

4 42

Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering (EPS)
The power steering uses a motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by a power steering control unit which senses the steering
wheel torque and vehicle speed to
command the motor.
The steering becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for optimum steering control.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.

• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steering
wheel may require increased
steering effort. Take your vehicle to
an authorized Kia dealer and have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, noise
may occur. If temperature rises, the
noise will likely disappear. This is a
normal condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary,
when the steering wheel is turned
all the way to the left or right continuously, the steering wheel
becomes harder to turn. The power
assist is limited to protect the
motor from overheating.
As time passes, the steering wheel
return to its normal condition.

✽ NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not
illuminate.
• The steering gets heavy immediately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the system performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
are completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK (OFF) position.
• A motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
(Continued)

4 43

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will likely disappear. This is a normal condition.
• When the charging system warning light comes on due to the low
voltage (When the alternator or
battery) does not operate normally or it malfunctions), the steering
wheel may require increased
steering effort.

Tilt and telescopic steering
Tilt and telescopic steering allows
you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can also raise it
to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.

WARNING - Steering
wheel adjustment
Never adjust the angle and
height of the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control.

4 44

OPS043032

To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock-release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3, if
equipped) then pull up the lockrelease lever to lock (4) the steering
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering wheel to the desired position before driving.

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)

Horn

The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.

CAUTION

OPS043033

With the ignition switch in the ON
position, pressing the heated steering wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button
will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off.

• Do not install any grip to operate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated
steering wheel, do not use an
organic solvent such as paint
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the steering
wheel.
• If the surface of steering
wheel is damaged by sharp
object, damage to the heated
steering wheel components
could occur.

OPS043034

To sound the horn, press the horn
symbols on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.

✽ NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.

4 45

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION

FLEX STEER

Do not strike the horn severely
to operate it, or hit it with your
fist. Do not press on the horn
with a sharp-pointed object.

OPS043209
OPS043036

The FLEX STEER controls steering
effort based upon as driver's preference or road condition.
You can select the desired steering
mode by pressing the FLEX STEER
button.

4 46

When the steering mode button is
pressed, the selected steering mode
will appear on the instrument cluster.
If the steering mode button is pressed
within 4 seconds, the steering mode
will change as shown above.
If the steering wheel mode button is
not pressed for about 4 seconds, the
LCD display will change to the previous screen (for Type B cluster).

Features of your vehicle

Normal mode

Sport mode

Comfort mode

OPS043129

OPS043130

OPS043131

The normal mode offers medium
steering effort.

The steering wheel becomes heavier. The sport mode is usually used
when driving on the highway.

The steering wheel becomes lighter.
The comfort mode is usually used
when driving in the city or when parking the vehicle.

4 47

Features of your vehicle

• For your safety, if you press the
steering mode button while operating the steering wheel, but the
steering effort will not change
immediately. After operating the
steering wheel, the steering effort
will change automatically to the
selected mode.
• Use caution when changing the
steering mode while driving.
• When the electronic power steering is not operating properly, the
flex steering wheel will not work.

4 48

Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
or cargo area which would interfere
with your vision through the rear window.

WARNING
- Mirror adjustment

Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)

Do not adjust the rearview mirror while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control.

Night

WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and don’t install a wide mirror. It
could result in injury, during an
accident or deployment of the
air bag.

Day
OAM049023

Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during
night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.

4 49

Features of your vehicle

Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the
headlights of the vehicles behind you
in nighttime or low light driving conditions. The sensor mounted in the mirror senses the light level around the
vehicle, and automatically controls
the headlight glare from the vehicles
behind you.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into reverse (R), the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.

4 50

CAUTION - Cleaning
mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror. It may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.

Indicator

Sensor

OAM042349L

To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light
will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light
will illuminate.

Features of your vehicle

Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust the mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent damage during an
automatic vehicle wash or when
passing through a narrow street.
The right outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.

CAUTION
- Rearview mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should
restrict the movement of the mirror, do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use a
deicer spray, or a sponge or soft
cloth with very warm water.

WARNING
- Mirror adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result
in loss of control.

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use an
approved spray de-icer (not radiator
antifreeze) to release the frozen
mechanism or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.

4 51

Features of your vehicle

Remote control

CAUTION - Outside mirror

OPS043035

Electric type
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the position
of the left and right outside rearview
mirrors. To adjust the position of either
mirror the ignition switch should be in
the ACC position. Move the switch (1)
to R or L to select the right side mirror
or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected
mirror up, down, left or right.
After the adjustment, put the switch
into the neutral (center) position to
prevent inadvertent adjustment.
4 52

• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.

Folding the outside rearview mirror

OPS043037

Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.

Features of your vehicle

OPS043038

Electric type
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded or unfolded by pressing the
switch as below.
Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Right (2) : The mirror will fold.

Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the transmitter.
• With smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the smart key.
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the button on the outside door
handle.
- The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession. (if equipped)

CAUTION - Electric type
outside
rearview mirror
The electric type outside
rearview mirror operates even
though the ignition switch is in
the OFF position. However, to
prevent unnecessary battery
discharge, do not adjust the
mirrors longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
In case it is an electric type outside rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause motor
failure.

4 53

Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A

1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
■ Type B

7. Turn signal indicator lights

❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.

OPS043100C/OPS043101C

4 54

Features of your vehicle

Instrument Cluster Control

LCD Display Control

■ Type A

Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination

■ Type A

OPS043117
■ Type B

OPS043202
■ Type B

OPS043039

The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is changed by
pressing the illumination control button
("+" or "-") when the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the
tale lights are turned on.

OTF044112L

• If you hold the illumination control
button ("+" or "-"), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.

OPS043040

The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.

4 55

Features of your vehicle

[For type A cluster]
(1) TRIP : TRIP button for changing
trip modes
(2) RESET : RESET button
for
resetting items
[For type B cluster]
(1)
: MODE button for changing
modes or SELECT button
for setting the selected item
(2)
: MOVE button for changing
items or RESET button for
resetting the selected item

Tachometer

Gauges
Speedometer

■ Type A

OPS043104N
OPS043102N

■ Type B

❈ For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.

OPS043106
OPS043103C

The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).

4 56

The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).

Features of your vehicle

Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
■ Type A

CAUTION - Red zone
Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.

If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the “H”
position, it indicates overheating that
may damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to “If the Engine
Overheats” in chapter 6.

WARNING - Hot radiato
OPS043108
■ Type B

Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pressure
and could severely burn. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.

OPS043109

This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.

4 57

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Fuel Gauge
■ Type A

OPS043110
■ Type B

• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.

WARNING - Fuel gauge
Stop and obtain additional fuel
as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when
the gauge indicator comes
close to the E level. Running out
of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger.

CAUTION - Low fuel
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
✽ NOTICE

OPS043111

This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.

4 58

Fuel display may not be accurate if
you are filling in sloping places.

Features of your vehicle

Odometer

Outside Temperature Gauge

■ Type A

OPS043113C
■ Type B

OPS043114C
■ Type B

The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive.
To change the temperature unit (from
°C to °F or from °F to °C)
• Type A Cluster
Change the trip modes to Distance
To Empty mode and then press and
hold the RESET button for 5 seconds
and more.
• Type B Cluster
The temperature unit can be
changed by using the "User
Settings" mode of the LCD display
❈ For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.

OPS043118C

OPS043119C

The odometer Indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles
or kilometers.

This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).
- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C(40°F ~ 140°F)

4 59

Features of your vehicle

Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator
■ Type A

•
•
•
•
•

Park : P
Reverse : R
Neutral : N
Drive : D
Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator
(if equipped)
■ Type A

OPS043115
■ Type B

OPS043116
■ Type B

OTF044125L

OTF044402

This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.

This indicator informs which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
• Shifting up : ▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6
• Shifting down : ▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5

4 60

Features of your vehicle

For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st
gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th,
or 6th gear).
When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.

4 61

Features of your vehicle
LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
LCD Modes (for type B cluster)
Modes
Trip Computer

Symbol

Explanation
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.

Turn By Turn
(if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

A/V
(if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the A/V system.

Service
This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and warning messages
related to TPMS and so on.
Master warning

User Settings

On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.

❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.

4 62

Features of your vehicle

Service Mode
Service Interval

OPS043134C

Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30
days, "Service in" message is displayed for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.

OTF044196L

OTF044192L

Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serviced according to the already inputted
service interval, “Service required”
message is displayed for several seconds each time you set the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to
the ON position (The mileage and
time changes to "---").
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
- Press the RESET button
for
more than 1 second.

Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
“Service in OFF” message is displayed on the LCD display.

✽ NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.

4 63

Features of your vehicle

Master Warning Mode
(if equipped)
• This warning light informs the driver the following situations
- Service reminder (if equipped)
The Master Warning Light illuminates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
LCD Modes Icon will be changed back
to its previous icon ( ).

User Settings Mode
Description

OPS043132

On this mode, you can change setting of the doors, lamps, and so on.

4 64

Door
Auto Door Lock (if equipped)
• Off:
The auto door lock operation will
be deactivated.
• Speed (for manual transaxle)
All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).
• Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
locked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted from the P
(Park) position to the R (Reverse),
N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

Features of your vehicle

Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)
• Off:
The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
• Key Out or Power Off:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key is
removed from ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
• Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position.
Two Press Unlock (if equipped)
• Off:
The two press unlock function will
be deactivated. Therefore, all doors
will unlock if the door is unlocked.
• On:
The driver’s door will unlock if the
door is unlocked. When the door is
unlocked again within 4 seconds,
all doors will unlock.

Horn Feedback (if equipped)
• Off:
The Horn feedback operation will
be deactivated.
• On:
After locking the door by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter, if
you press the lock button again
within 4 seconds, the warning
sound will operate once to indicate
that all doors are locked.

Lamp
One Touch Turn Lamp (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the lane
change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7
times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the headlamp
delay function will be activated.

Settings
Language
Choose the language you prefer
within the LCD.
Temperature Unit
Convert the temperature unit from °C
to °F or from °F to °C.
Welcome Sound
If this item is checked, the welcome
sound function will be activated.
AVG Fuel Eco Reset
• Auto Reset:
The average fuel economy will
reset automatically when refueling.
• Manual Reset:
The average fuel economy will not
reset automatically whenever refueling.
For more details, refer to “Trip
Computer” in this chapter.

4 65

Features of your vehicle

Service Interval

A/V Mode (if equipped)

Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)

OPS043133C

OTF044129

OPS043208C

On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(mi. or km) and period (months).

This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.

This mode displays the state of the
navigation.

4 66

Features of your vehicle

Warning Messages
Shift to "P" position (for smart key
system and automatic transaxle)

Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)

Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and automatic transaxle)

OTF044142L
OTF044148L

• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).

• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.

OTF044152L

• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.

4 67

Features of your vehicle

Press clutch pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and manual
transaxle)

OTF044190L

• This warning message illuminates if
the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the clutch pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the clutch pedal to start the engine.

4 68

Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)

Key not detected
(for smart key system)

OTF044138L

OTF044140L

• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
while the door is opened or closed
with the ignition switch in the ACC
position or engine is running.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.

• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.

Features of your vehicle

Press start button again
(for smart key system)

Press start button with smart key
(for smart key system)

OTF044144L

OTF044146L

• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.

• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.

Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH"
(for smart key system and automatic transaxle)

OTF044157L

• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.

4 69

Features of your vehicle

Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
(for smart key system and automatic transaxle)

Door Open

Tailgate Open

OPS043121

• It means that any door is open.
OTF044150L

• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.

✽ NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.

4 70

OPS043122

• It means that the tailgate is open.

Features of your vehicle

Sunroof Open (if equipped)

Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
(if equipped)

• The "FUSE" and "on" warning
messages are displayed alternately. (for Type A)
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.

■ Type A

For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 7.

OPS043120

• The warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine when the
sunroof is open.

OPS044309L
■ Type B

OPS043405L

• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.

4 71

Features of your vehicle
TRIP COMPUTER
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)

Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related
to driving.

Trip Modes (for Type A cluster)
Tripmeter A
Tripmeter B
Range

✽ NOTICE

OTF044159L

• This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.

4 72

Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.

Average Fuel Economy*
Average Vehicle Speed*
Elapsed Time*
* if equipped

To change the trip mode, press the
TRIP button.

Features of your vehicle

Trip Modes (for Type B cluster)
FUEL ECONOMY

Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi.
or km
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
RESET/
button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second
when the tripmeter is displayed.

Trip A/B
■ Type A

• Range
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy

TRIP A

• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]

OPS043125C
■ Type B

TRIP B

• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]

OPS043127C

Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is calculated by the total driving distance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 160 MPH or 200
km/h
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the RESET/
button on the
steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.

To change the trip mode, press the
MOVE button
.

4 73

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Fuel Economy

• The average vehicle speed is not displayed if the driving distance is less
than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.

Range (1)

Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driving time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press
the RESET/
button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second
when the elapsed time is displayed.

✽ NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.

4 74

■ Type A

OPS043123C
■ Type B

OPS043128C

• The range to empty is the estimated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range : 30 ~ 1999 mi or
50 ~ 1999 km.

• If the estimated distance is below
50 km (30 mi.), the trip computer
will display “---” as distance to
empty.
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the distance to empty
function may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons (6 liters ) of fuel are added to
the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.

Features of your vehicle

Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
MPG or L/100km
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automatically.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the RESET/
button on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average fuel
economy is displayed.

Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refueling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to “LCD Display”).
Under “Auto Reset” mode, the average fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).

Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few seconds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 99.9
MPG or L/100km

✽ NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not displayed for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 0.03 miles (50
meters) since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.

4 75

Features of your vehicle
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning lights

✽ NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.

4 76

Air bag Warning Light

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.

This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.

Features of your vehicle

Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required (For more details,
refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the
brake system is still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized Kia dealer
and inspected.

Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

4 77

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Parking Brake
& Brake Fluid Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.

4 78

Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.

Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.

WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brake

Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light (if equipped)

Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)

When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.

This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.

This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.

force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light

CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.

4 79

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION - Gasoline
Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.

4 80

Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.

If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.

Features of your vehicle

Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not available, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.

CAUTION - Engine Oil
Pressure Warning Light
• If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine
Oil Pressure Warning Light is
illuminated, severe damage
could result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be
serious engine damage or
malfunction. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and
check the oil level. If the oil
level is low, fill the engine
oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after
the engine is started, turn
the engine off immediately.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

Low Fuel Level Warning
Light

This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.

CAUTION - Low Fuel
Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “0 or E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter
(if equipped).

4 81

Features of your vehicle

Door Ajar Warning Light

Washer Fluid Warning
Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.

This warning light illuminates:
• When the washer fluid level in the
reservoir is nearly empty.
In this case, you should refill the
washer fluid.

Tailgate Open Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the tailgate is not closed
securely.

4 82

Sunroof Open Warning
Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:
When the sunroof is not closed
securely.

Features of your vehicle

Fuel cap open warning
indicator (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:
• When the fuel filler cap is not tighten securely.
Always make sure that the fuel
filler cap is tight.

Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light

This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.

4 83

Features of your vehicle

Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light

ECOMINDER® indicator
Active ECO system

This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.

This indicator light illuminates:
When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECOMINDER® indicator
(green) will illuminate to show that
the Active ECO is operating.
For more detailed information, refer
to "Active ECO" in chapter 5.

For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

4 84

ECO

Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.

Features of your vehicle

Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.

This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehicle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in section 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.

Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illuminate at all.

4 85

Features of your vehicle

High Beam Indicator
Light

Light ON Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.

This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.

This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.

Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)

For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.

This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.

4 86

Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)

CRUISE

Features of your vehicle

Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)

SET

FLEX STEER indicator
(if equipped)
SPORT NORMAL COMPORT

This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.

This indicator light illuminates:
• When you press the FLEX STEER
mode button.
For more details, refer to "FLEX
STEER" in chapter 4.

4 87

Features of your vehicle
REAR CAMERA DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)

OPS043050

OPS043051

The rear camera display will activate
when the back-up light is ON with the
ignition switch ON and the shift lever
in the R (Reverse) position.

4 88

This system is a supplemental system that helps the driver by displaying objects behind the vehicle when
backing up.
Always keep the camera lens clean.
If lens is covered with foreign matter,
the camera may not operate normally.
The rear camera display is not a
safety device. It only serves to assist
the driver in identifying objects
directly behind the middle of the
vehicle. The camera does NOT cover
the complete area behind the vehicle. While the camera's display is
generally accurate, objects can be
much closer than they appear in the
display screen and can be distorted
in both size and proportion.

WARNING - Backing up
using camera
Never rely solely on the rear
camera display when backing.
You must always use methods
of viewing the area behind you
including looking over both
shoulders as well as continuously checking all three rear
view mirrors. Due to the difficulty of ensuring that the area
behind you remains clear,
always back slowly and stop
immediately if you even suspect
that a person, and especially a
child, might be behind you.

Features of your vehicle
LIGHTING
Headlamp escort (if equipped)

Battery saver function

Daytime running light

If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACC or OFF position with the headlights ON, the headlights remain on
for about 5 minutes. However, if the
driver’s door is opened and closed,
the headlights are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmitter (or smart key) twice or turning
the light switch to the OFF or Auto
position. However, if you turn the light
switch to the Auto position when it is
dark outside, the headlights will not
be turned off immediately.

• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when
the driver removes the ignition key
and opens the driver-side door (in
that order).
• With this feature, the parking lights
will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of the road at
night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) may
help make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, and it is
especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1. The front fog light or headlight (low
beam) switch is ON.
2. The engine is OFF.
3. The parking brake is applied.

4 89

Features of your vehicle

Lighting control

Parking light position (

)

Headlight position (

)

OXM049110

OAM049041

OAM049042

The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the parking light position (1st position), the
tail, license and instrument panel
lights will turn ON.

When the light switch is in the headlight position (2nd position), the
head, tail, license and instrument
panel lights will turn ON.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.

4 90

Features of your vehicle

Auto light position (if equipped)

• Never place anything over sensor
(1) located on the instrument
panel. This will ensure better autolight system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a window cleaner. The cleaner may
leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto light
system may not work properly.

High beam operation

OMD040095

OAM049044

When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and headlights will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.

To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.

4 91

Features of your vehicle

Turn signals and lane change
signals

OAM049043

To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.

WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver's vision.

4 92

OAM049045

The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). The green arrow indicators
on the instrument panel indicate
which turn signal is operating. They
will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to
flash after a turn, manually return the
lever to the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.

Features of your vehicle

One-touch lane change function
To activate an one-touch lane
change function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it.
The lane change signals will blink 3,
5 or 7 times.
You can choose one-touch lane
change blinking function in "One
touch turn lamp" of "User setting".
Refer to "User setting" in chapter 4.

✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, the bulb may be
burned out or have a poor electrical
connection in the circuit.

Front fog light (if equipped)

OAM049046N

Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The
fog lights will turn on when the fog light
switch (1) is turned to the on position
after the headlight is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog
light switch (1) to the OFF position.
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.

4 93

Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer

Rear window wiper/washer
(if equipped)

Windshield wipers

OAM049101N
OAM049100N/OAM049048N

A : Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed

D : Rear wiper/washer control
· ON – Continuous wipe
· INT – Intermittent wipe
(if equipped)
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)
4 94

Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push
the lever upward and release
it with the lever in the OFF
position. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is
pushed upward and held.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob (1).

Features of your vehicle

LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.

The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.

Windshield washers

CAUTION - Washer pump
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.

OAM049102N

In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.

WARNING - Obscured
visibility
Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision.

4 95

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION
- Wipers& windshields
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner,
or other solvents on or near
them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.

4 96

Rear window wiper and washer
switch (if equipped)

OXM049125

OAM049103N

The rear window wiper switch is
located at the end of the wiper and
washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to the desired position to operate the
rear wiper and washer.
ON - Normal wiper operation
INT - Intermittent wiper operation
(if equipped)
OFF - Wiper is not in operation

Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever.

Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHT
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine is
not running.
It may cause battery discharge.

WARNING - Interior light
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark. The
glare from the interior lights
may obstruct your view and
cause an accident.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

Map lamp

• When all entrances are closed, if
you lock the vehicle by using the
transmitter or the smart key, all
interior lamp will be off after a few
seconds.
• If you do not operate anything in
the vehicle after turning off the
engine, the lights will turn off after
20 minutes.

■ Type A

OPS043052
■ Type B

OPS043053

Press the lens (1) or button (1) to
turn the map lamp on or off

4 97

Features of your vehicle

• ROOM (2) :
- The map lamp and room lamp
stays on at all times.
- To turn off the ROOM mode,
press the ROOM button (2) once
again (not pressed.)
• DOOR (3) :
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on when a door is opened.
The lamps go out after approximately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on for approximately 30
seconds when doors are unlocked
with a transmitter or smart key as
long as the doors are not opened.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on for approximately 20 minutes if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ON position.

4 98

- The map lamp and room lamp will
go out immediately if the ignition
switch is changed to the ON position or all doors are locked.
- To turn off the DOOR mode,
press the DOOR button (3) once
again (not pressed).

Room lamp
■ Type A

✽ NOTICE
• When the lamp is turned on by
pressing the lens (1), the lamp does
not turn off even if the DOOR
mode or ROOM mode is not
selected (not pressed).
• If the ROOM button and DOOR
button are pressed at the same
time, the map lamp and room
lamp will stay on at all times
(ROOM mode will be selected).

OPS043054
■ Type B

OPS043072

Press the button to turn the light on
or off.
If the front map lamp turns on by the
front map lamp switch, the room
lamp will turn on.

Features of your vehicle

Luggage room lamp

❈ If the portable lamp does not turn
on, it means the portable lamp
needs to be charged. Insert the
lamp holder and then charge it
again. The charge mode will be
activated if the ignition switch (or
engine start/stop button) is on
position or engine is running.

Portable lamp usage
(if equipped)

■ Type A

OPS043055
■ Type B
OPS043197

1. In-vehicle lamp, if necessary, after
separation can be used as a
portable.
2. Press push button (1).
3. Pull out the lamp holder.
4. Press the power switch (2).
OPS043056

The luggage room lamp comes on
when the tailgate is opened.
The lamp comes on as long as the
tailgate is open. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close
the tailgate securely after using the
luggage room.
4 99

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION - Portable lamp
damage
1. Remove the batteries when
not in use for a long time.
2. Use the specified battery.
3. You can use the regular batteries (Disposable batteries)
but do not use the Nonrechargeable
battery
in
charge mode. It may damage
the vehicle.
4. Do not place the lamp with
water or moist places and liquid compounds. These can
cause internal leakage of a
battery.
5. When replacing the batteries,
check the direction and insert.
It will not be charged if
installed reversely.
6. Do not mix the rechargeable
batteries.
It may not be charged normally.

4 100

If the portable lamp does not turn on
anymore after charged, replace the
rechargeable batteries.

Battery replacement

OTAM041101

When replacement is necessary, use
the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently try open the battery cover.
2. Replace the batteries with new
rechargeable batteries (AAA size).
When replacing the batteries,
make sure the position of batteries.
3. Close the cover carefully.

Features of your vehicle

Glove box lamp (if equipped)

Vanity mirror lamp
(if equipped)

OPS043057

The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the glove box
securely after using the glove box.

OAM042336

Pull the sunvisor downward and you
can turn the vanity mirror lamp ON or
OFF by pushing the button.
•
: To turn the lamp ON.
• O : To turn the lamp OFF.
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, turn off the lamp by
pushing the O button after using the
lamp.

4 101

Features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
CAUTION - Conductors
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this section.

Rear window defroster
■ Type A

OPS043150
■ Type B

OPS043153
■ Type C

OPS043152

4 102

The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster button again.

Features of your vehicle

Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
The front wiper deicer will operate at
the same time you turn on the front
windshield defroster.
• To turn off the wiper deicer, press
the front windshield defroster button again.
• The front wiper deicer automatically turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch
is turned off.

4 103

Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Fan speed control knob

3. Mode selection knob

5. Temperature control knob

2. Air intake control button

4. Rear window defroster button

6. Air conditioning button
(if equipped)

OPS043154

4 104

Features of your vehicle

Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.

OPS043058

4 105

Features of your vehicle

Mode selection
Vent mode (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.

Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E)
OPS043155

The mode selection knob controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent.

4 106

Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.

Floor mode (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.

Floor/Defrost mode
(A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.

Defrost mode (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window
defrosters.

Features of your vehicle

Temperature control

OPS043059

Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.

OPS043159
OPS043156

The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flow from the ventilation system.
To change the air temperature in the
passenger compartment, turn the
knob to the right position for warm air
or left position for cooler air.

To operate the MAX A/C, turn the
temperature knob to extreme left. Air
flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.

4 107

Features of your vehicle

Air intake control

Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger compartment will be drawn
through the heating system and heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.

OPS043160

The air intake control is used to
select the outside (fresh) air position
or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position, press the control button.

Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the passenger compartment may become
stale.

4 108

In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING - Recirculated
air
Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.

WARNING
- Reduced visibilty
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.

Features of your vehicle

Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
When the heater or air conditioning
system is on with the sunroof
opened, the outside (fresh) air position will be automatically selected. At
this time, if you press the recirculated
air position button, the recirculated
air position will be selected but will
change back to the outside (fresh) air
position after 3 minutes.
When the sunroof is closed, the air
intake position will return to the original position that was selected.

Fan speed control

To turn off the blowers

OPS043157

OPS043158

The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flow
from the ventilation system. To
change the fan speed, turn the knob
to the right for higher speed, or left
for lower speed. To turn the fan
speed control off, turn the knob to
the “0” position.

To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the "0" position.

4 109

Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning (if equipped)

OPS043161

Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning system off.

4 110

Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or
position.

Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.

Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning (if equipped)
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Press the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, set the mode
control to the MAX A/C position,
then set the fan speed control to
the highest speed.

CAUTION - Excessive A/C
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine
coolant closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating
and potential engine damage.
Continue to use the blower fan
but turn the air conditioning system off if the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicates
engine overheating.

Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system performance.

4 111

Features of your vehicle

• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.

4 112

✽ NOTICE

Climate control air filter
(if equipped)

• Replace the filter every 15,000
miles or once a year.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia
dealer.

Outside air
Recirculated
air

Blower
Climate control
air filter

Evaporator
core

Heater core
1LDA5047

The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system. If
dust or other pollutants accumulate in
the filter over a period of time, the air
flow from the air vents may decrease,
resulting in moisture accumulation on
the inside of the windshield even
when the outside (fresh) air position is
selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an
authorized Kia dealer.

Features of your vehicle

Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative impact on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used, otherwise
damage to the vehicle and
injury may occur. To prevent
damage, the air conditioning
system in your vehicle should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.

WARNING
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle's air conditioning system is under very high pressure. If proper service procedures are not followed an explosion may result. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death,
the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be
serviced by trained and certified technicians.

4 113

Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A

1. Temperature control button / knob
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. Rear windshield defroster button
4. Climate control display
5. Air intake control button

■ Type B

6. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
7. Fan speed control button
8. AUTO (automatic control) button
9. OFF button
10. Mode selection button
11. Climate control information screen
selection button

OPS043162/OPS043163

4 114

Features of your vehicle

Automatic heating and air conditioning

✽ NOTICE

■ Type A

OPS043170
■ Type B
OPS043164
■ Type B

OPS043171

OPS043165

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicated by AUTO on the display. The
modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by temperature setting.

2. Push the temperature control button to set the desired temperature.
(Type A)
Turn the temperature control knob
to set the desired temperature.
(Type B)

• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The ‘AUTO’
sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.
• Regardless of the temperature setting, when using automatic operation, the air conditioning system
can automatically turn on to
decrease the humidity inside the
vehicle, even if the temperature is
set to warm.

4 115

Features of your vehicle

Manual heating and air conditioning

OPS043071

Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.

4 116

The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected.
When pressing any button (or turning
any knob) except AUTO button while
automatic operation, the functions
not selected will be controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.

Mode selection
■ Type A

OPS043166
■ Type B

OPS043167

The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.

Features of your vehicle

The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:

Vent mode (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air
discharged from the outlet.

Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E)
Air flow is discharged towards the
face and floor.

Floor mode (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defroster.

Floor/Defrost mode
(A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.

4 117

Features of your vehicle

■ Type A

Temperature control
■ Type A

OPS043168
■ Type B

OPS043059

Instrument panel vents
The outlet port can be opened or
closed separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.

OPS043170
■ Type B

OPS043169

Defrost mode (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.

4 118

OPS043171

• Type A
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by pushing the button
( ).

Features of your vehicle

The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by pushing the button
( ).
When pushing the button, the temperature will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.
• Type B
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to
the right extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to
the left extremely.
When turning the knob, the temperature will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.

Temperature scale conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Centigrade.
This is normal condition. You can
switch the temperature scale as follows;
While pressing the AUTO button,
press the OFF button for 3 seconds
or more. The temperature scale will
change
from
Centigrade
to
Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by
using the “User Settings” mode of the
LCD display.

Air intake control
■ Type A

OPS043172
■ Type B

OPS043173

This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

4 119

Features of your vehicle

Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when
the recirculated air position is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
passenger compartment
will be drawn through the
heating system and heated or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button does not illuminate
when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected.
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.

4 120

WARNING
- Reduced visibility
Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.

It should be noted that prolonged
operation of the heating in recirculated air position will cause fogging of
the windshield and side windows and
the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected, will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

Features of your vehicle

Fan speed control

To change the fan speed, press the
button ( ) for higher speed, or push
the button ( ) for lower speed. To
turn the fan speed control off, press
the OFF button and select outside
(fresh) air position.

■ Type A

OPS043176
■ Type B

OPS043177

The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pressing the fan
speed control button.

4 121

Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning

Blower OFF

■ Type A

Climate information screen
selection (if equipped)
■ Type B

OPS043174
■ Type B

OPS043178
■ Type B
OPS043180

Press the climate information screen
selection button to view climate information in full screen mode.

OPS043175

OPS043179

Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.

Push the OFF button to turn off the
blower. However you can still operate
the mode and air intake buttons as
long as the ignition switch is in the
position ON.

4 122

Features of your vehicle

System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or
position.

4 123

Features of your vehicle

4 124

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Climate control air filter
(if equipped)

Outside air
Recirculated
air

Blower
Climate control
air filter

Heater core
Evaporator
core

1LDA5047

4 125

Features of your vehicle

4 126

Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the
or
position during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the
position and fan
speed control knob or button to
the lower speed.

• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grille
to improve heater and defroster
efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the
windshield.

Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield

OPS043181

1. Select any fan speed except “0”
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
mode.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

4 127

Features of your vehicle

To defrost outside windshield

Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
■ Type A

OPS043182

1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.

OPS043183
■ Type B

OPS043185

1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.

4 128

3. Press the defrost button (
).
4. The air-conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected ambient temperature, outside (fresh) air
position and higher fan speed will
be selected automatically.
If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh)
air position and higher fan speed are
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button or knob manually.
If the
position is selected, with a
low fan speed, a higher fan speed
may be automatically selected.

Features of your vehicle

To defrost outside windshield
■ Type A

4. The air-conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected
ambient temperature and outside
(fresh) air position will be selected
automatically.
If the
position is selected, with a
low fan speed, a higher fan speed
may be automatically selected.

Defogging logic
To reduce the possibility of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to
certain conditions such as
or
position. To cancel or return to the
defogging logic, do the following.

OPS043184
■ Type B

OPS043186

1. Set fan speed to the highest position.
2. Set temperature to the Maximum
(HI).
3. Press the defrost button (
).

4 129

Features of your vehicle

Manual climate control system

If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it will be reset to the
defog logic status.

Automatic climate control system
■ Type A

OPS043189
OPS043187

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to
the defrost position ( ).
3. Within 10 seconds after select the
defrost positon, press the air
intake control button (
) at least
5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.

4 130

■ Type B

OPS043188

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defrost button ( ).

Features of your vehicle
CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button (
) at least 5
times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it will be reset to the
defog logic status.

OPS043206

When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch turns to the OFF position.

4 131

Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
These compartments can be used to
store small items.
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while driving.
Do not attempt to place so many
items in the storage compartment
that the storage compartment
cover cannot close securely.

Center console storage

Glove box

■ Type A

OPS043060

WARNING - Flammable

■ Type B

OPS043062

materials
Do not store, propane cylinders
or other flammable/explosive
materials in the vehicle. These
items may catch fire and/or
explode if the vehicle is exposed
to hot temperatures for extended
periods.

To open the glove box, push the button and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after
use.
Always keep the glove box closed
while the vehicle is in operation.
OPS043061

These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or front passenger.
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever. (Type B)

4 132

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Cool box (if equipped)

Sunglass holder

Do not put perishable food in the
cool box because it may not maintain the necessary consistent temperature to keep the food fresh.

✽ NOTICE
If the temperature control knob is in
the warm or hot position, warm or
hot air will flow into the glove box.

OPS043064

OPS043065

You can keep beverage cans or other
items cool in the glove box.
1. Turn on the air conditioning.
2. Slide the open/close lever of the
vent installed in the glove box to
the open position.
3. When the cool box is not used,
slide the lever to the closed position.
If some items in the cool box block
the vent, the cooling effectiveness of
the coolbox is reduced.

To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out.
To close the sunglass holder, push it
up.
Do not place other items in the sunglass holder.

4 133

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Sunglass
holder
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects
can be thrown from the holder
in the event of a sudden stop
or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the
vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an opened sunglass holder.

4 134

Luggage box (if equipped)

OPS043198

You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc. in the box for
easy access.

Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup holder

■ Type A

Rear (if equipped)

WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups
with hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you burn
yourself. Such a burn to the
driver could lead to loss of control of the vehicle.

OPS043067
■ Type B

✽ NOTICE
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and damage electrical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high
temperature. This may damage
the cup holder.

OPS043068

To use the cup holder, folding the
center seat or pull down the armrest.

OPS043066

Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.

4 135

Features of your vehicle

Sunvisor

CAUTION - Vanity
mirror lamp (if equipped)
If you use the vanity mirror
lamp, turn off the lamp before
return the sunvisor to its original position. It could result in
battery discharge and possible
sunvisor damage.

Seat warmer (if equipped)
■ Type A

OPS033012
OVG049174

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward (3). (if equipped)
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
To use the vanity mirror lamp, switch
it on. (if equipped)
The ticket holder (5, if equipped) is
provided for holding a tollgate ticket.
4 136

■ Type B

OPS033013

The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.

Features of your vehicle

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
• Each time you press the switch,
the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
→
)

HIGH (

)
→

→
LOW (

→

→
HIGH (

• Type B
OFF

→

• Type A
OFF

)

MIDDLE (

→
LOW (

)

• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.

✽ NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.

CAUTION
- Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place anything on the seats that insulates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
• Be careful not to spill liquid
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liquid, wipe the seat with a dry
towel. Before using the seat
warmer, dry the seat completely.

WARNING - Seat heater
burns
The seat warmer may cause
burns, even at low temperatures, if used over a long period
of time. Never allow passengers
who may not be able to take
care of themselves to be
exposed to the risk of seat
heater burns. These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)

4 137

Features of your vehicle

OPS033014

The temperature setting of the seat
changes according to the switch
position.
• If you want to cool your seat cushion, press the switch (blue color).
• Each time you press the button,
the airflow will change as follows:
→

OFF
→
HIGH (

)
→

MIDDLE (

)

→
LOW (

4 138

)

• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat air
ventilation operating, the seat air
ventilation will turn OFF.
• The seat air ventilation defaults to
the OFF position whenever the
ignition switch is turned on.

CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on the seat. Those
things may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Be careful not to spill liquid
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liquid,
wipe the seat with a dry towel.
Before using the air ventilation
seat, dry the seat completely.

Rear seat warmer (if equipped)

OPS033031

The seat warmer is provided to warm
the rear outboard seats during cold
weather. With the ignition switch in
the ON position, push either of the
switches to warm rear seats.
During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
OFF → HIGH (

→

Seat air ventilation (if equipped)

) → LOW (

)

Features of your vehicle

• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the engine
start/stop button (the ignition switch)
is turned on.

✽ NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.

CAUTION
- Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may
damage the surface of the
heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything
on the seats that insulates
against heat, such as blankets,
cushions or seat covers while
the seat warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
• Be careful not to spill liquid
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liquid,
wipe the seat with a dry towel.
Before using the seat warmer,
dry the seat completely.

4 139

Features of your vehicle

Power outlet (if equipped)
■ Front (Type A)

OPS043069
■ Rear (if equipped)

OPS043070

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
4 140

• Use the power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could
cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A(Driver’s
side) or 15A(Passenger’s side) in
electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater
to the lowest operating level when
using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic
interference
when
plugged into a vehicle’s power outlet. These devices may cause
excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.

WARNING - Electric
shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand.You may get an electric
shock.

Features of your vehicle

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

Floor mat anchor(s)
■ Driver's side

■ Passenger's side

ORP042186

OTFNCO2001

To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of hanger.
Be careful when opening and closing
the doors. Clothes, etc. may get
caught between the door gap.

When using a floor mat on the floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the
floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle.
This keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward.

CAUTION - Hanging
clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes,
since those may damage the
hook.

WARNING - After market
floor mat
Do not install aftermarket floor
mats that are not capable of
being securely attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
Unsecured floor mats can interfere with pedal operation.

The following must be observed
when installing ANY floormat to the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floormats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floormat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floormat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floormat anchors.
• Do not stack floormats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floormat). Only a single floormat should
be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side floormat anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floormat in place.
To avoid any interference with pedal
operation, Kia recommends that only
the Kia floormat designed for use in
your vehicle be installed.

4 141

Features of your vehicle

Luggage net holder
(if equipped)

WARNING - Luggage net

OPS043193

To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the holders
located in the cargo area to attach
the luggage net.
If necessary, contact your authorized
Kia dealer to obtain a luggage net.
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky objects
in the luggage compartment.

4 142

• Always keep your face and
body out of the luggage net
recoil path and avoid using
the luggage net when the
straps have visible signs of
wear or damage. The luggage
net can snap and cause
injuries.
• All cargo should be evenly
distributed, properly secured
and never piled higher than
the seatback.

Cargo area cover (if equipped)

OPS043199

Use the cargo area cover to hide
items stored in the cargo area.

Features of your vehicle

OPS043200

To use the cargo area cover, insert
the 4 edges into the slots.

WARNING - Objects
• Do not place objects on the
cargo area cover. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants
during an accident or when
braking.
• All cargo should be evenly
distributed, properly secured
and never piled higher than
the seatback.
CAUTION - Luggage
Since the cargo area cover may
be damaged or malformed, do
not apply excessive force to the
cover or do not put the heavy
loads on it.

4 143

Features of your vehicle
EXTERIOR FEATURES
✽ NOTICE

Mounting bracket for roof carrier
(if equipped)

If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, be sure not to position cargo
onto the roof in such a way that it
could interfere with sunroof operation.

CAUTION - Loading roof
OED046091

OPS043207

To install or remove a roof carrier,
you can use the mounting bracket
and cover on the roof.
When you install a roof carrier, do
the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool (coin or flat blade
driver) into the slot and slide the
cover toward the arrow on the
cover.

4 144

2. Rotate the cover half way and
insert the cover on the roof hole as
the illustration.

✽ NOTICE
To prevent losing the roof carrier
cover, install the cover on the roof
before you install the roof carrier.
3. After using the roof carrier, install
the cover back on the roof in the
reverse order.

rack
When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, take the necessary precautions to make sure the cargo
does not damage the roof of the
vehicle.

Features of your vehicle

• When carrying large objects on the
roof, make sure they do not exceed
the overall roof length or width.
• The vehicle center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded onto
the roof. Avoid sudden starts, braking, sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers
or high speeds that may result in
loss of vehicle control or rollover
resulting in an accident.
• To prevent damage or loss of cargo
while driving, check frequently
before or while driving to make
sure the items on the roof are
securely fastened.

WARNING - Driving with
roof load
Always drive slow and turn corners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack. The vehicle center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack.

4 145

Features of your vehicle
AUDIO SYSTEM
If you install aftermarket HID head
lamps, your vehicle’s audio and electronic devices may malfunction.

Antenna (if equipped)

CAUTION - Antenna
Before entering a place with a
low height clearance or a car
wash, remove the antenna pole
by rotating it counterclockwise.
If not, the antenna may be damaged.

OHM048154N

Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to
receive AM or/and FM broadcast signals.
This antenna pole is removable. To
remove the roof antenna pole, turn it
counterclockwise. To install the roof
antenna pole, turn it clockwise.

4 146

• When reinstalling your roof antenna, it is important that it is fully
tightened and adjusted to the
upright position to ensure proper
reception.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.

Features of your vehicle

Audio remote control
(if equipped)

WARNING

OPS043190

The steering wheel audio remote
control button may be installed.
Do not operate the audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.

Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or that are not permissible by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.

VOLUME (VOL+/ VOL-) (1)
• Push the VOL + to increase volume.
• Push the VOL - to decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for 1 second or more, it will
work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
USB mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 1 second, it will
work as follows in each mode.

4 147

Features of your vehicle

RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION select buttons.

Aux, USB and iPod® * port
(if equipped)

USB mode
It will function as the FILE UP/DOWN
button.

* iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

MODE (3)
Press the button to select Radio,
USB or AUX.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.

4 148

When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of
the portable audio device.

OPS043194

If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or
iPod® port, you can use an aux port
to connect audio devices and an USB
port to plug in an USB and also an
iPod® port to plug in an iPod®.

Features of your vehicle

Speaker lights (if equipped)

OPS043195

OPS043196

The speaker lights that lights around
the front speaker is adjusted by turning the knob as follows.

1. OFF : The light turns off.
2. MUSIC :
The red light blinks according to the
sound of the audio.
If the audio is not turned on, the
light does not turn on.
3. MOOD :
The light color changes automatically at regular interval.
4. +/- :
When the lights are on, push the
illumination button to adjust the
light intensity.
If low lighting grade is selected, the
intensity of light may be weak or
may not illuminate according to the
audio volume or selected condition.

✽ NOTICE
When the doors are opened, the
lighting system will not operate.

The lighting around the front speaker
may not illuminate when the sound of
the audio is low.
Do not use the lights for extended
periods when engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.

4 149

Features of your vehicle

This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.

How vehicle audio works
FM reception

AM reception

¢ ¢ ¢

¢ ¢¢

JBM002
JBM001

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be
strong and clear.

4 150

AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long distance,low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.

Features of your vehicle

FM radio station

¢ ¢¢

JBM003

JBM004

JBM005

FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station. Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, mountains, and obstructions. This can
lead to undesirable or unpleasant listening conditions which might lead
you to believe a problem exists with
your radio. The following conditions
are normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from several directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
4 151

Features of your vehicle

Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.
When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a
radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.

4 152

WARNING - Cell phone
use
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.

WARNING - Driver
Distraction
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.

WARNING - Audio System
Do not disassemble, assemble,
or modify the audio system.
Such acts could result in fire or
electric shock.
WARNING - Antenna
Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning
induced electric shock.

CAUTION
Refrain from use if the screen is
blank or no sound can be hear
as these signs may indicate
product malfunction.

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Driver distraction
Operating the device while driving could lead to accidents due
to a lack of attention to external
surroundings. Park the vehicle
before attempting to set or program the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle. Driving
in a state where external sounds
cannot be heard may lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting
when turning the device on. A sudden output of extreme volume
upon turning the device on could
lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)

CAUTION
• Turn on the car ignition before
using the audio system Do not
operate the audio system for
long periods of time with the
ignition turned off as such
operations may lead to battery
discharge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch
screen.
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
audio system and use a dry
and smooth cloth. Never use
tough materials, chemical
cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as
such materials may damage
the device panel or cause
color/quality deterioration
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• In case of product malfunction, please contact your place
of purchase or After Service
center.
• Placing the audio system
within an electromagnetic
environment may result in
noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions
such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the
dashboard because they may
cause damage or discoloration.

4 153

Features of your vehicle

USING THE USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the
vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• The System may not play unauthenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the
compression
rate
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression
rate between 8Kbps ~
320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.
(Continued)
4 154

(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the
connected external USB device
can be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not
either
512BYTE
or
2048BYTE, then the device will
not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact with the human body or
other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a
short period of time, it may break
the device.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.
• If you disconnect the external
USB device during playback in
USB mode, the external USB
device can be damaged or may
malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio)
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time for recognition the device.
• Do not use the USB device for
purposes other than playing
music files.
• Playing videos through the USB
is not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a
USB hub purchased separately,
the vehicle’s audio system may
not recognize the USB device. In
that case, connect the USB
device directly to the multimedia
terminal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by
logical drives, only the music
files on the highest-priority drive
are recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera
can be unrecognizable by standard USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle vibrations are not supported.
(i-stick type)
• Some
non-standard
USB
devices (METAL COVER TYPE
USB) can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory readers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,
etc.) or external-HDD type
devices can be unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory
may be lost while using this
audio. Always back up important
data on a personal storage
device.
• Please avoid using
USB memory products which can be
used as key chains or
cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug
type connector products.

4 155

Features of your vehicle

USING iPod® DEVICE
iPhone is a registered grademark of
Apple inc.
• Some iPod® models may not support communication protocol and
files may not properly play.
Supported iPod® models:
- iPhone® 3GS/4
- iPod® touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod® classic
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod® can be different
from the order searched in the
audio system.
• If the iPod® is disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the iPod®.
(Reset: Refer to iPod® manual)
• An iPod® may not operate normally
on low battery.
(Continued)
®

4 156

(Continued)
• Some iPod® devices, such as the
iPhone®, can be connected
through the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology interface. The device
must have audio Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology capability
(such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ).
The device can play, but it will not
be controlled by the audio system.
• To use iPod® features within the
audio, use the cable provided upon
purchasing an iPod® device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod®/iPhone®
device.
• If your iPhone® is connected to
both the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology and USB, only support
iPod® mode because the sound
may not be properly played in
Bluetooth® Audio Streaming. To
use Bluetooth® Audio Streaming,
disconnect iPod® cable with
iPhone®.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• When connecting iPod® with the
iPod® Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted completely, communications between
iPod® and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod® and the audio system,
the sound effects of both devices
will overlap and might reduce or
distort the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod® when adjusting the audio system’s volume, and
turn off the equalizer of the audio
system when using the equalizer of
an iPod®.
• When not using iPod® with car
audio, detach the iPod® cable from
iPod®. Otherwise, iPod® may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology(if equipped)
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
A Bluetooth® enabled call phone is
required to use Bluetooth® wireless
technology.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

Before Using the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree
What is Bluetooth® ?
• Bluetooth® refers to a short-distance
wireless networking technology
which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz
frequency to connect various
devices within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and
automotive
environments,
Bluetooth® allows data to be transmitted at high speeds without having to use a connector cable.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to
conveniently make phone calls with
Bluetooth® mobile phones through
the audio system.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
To learn more about mobile device
compatibility, visit www.kia.com.

Precautions for Safe Driving
• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice
safe driving. Connecting the head
unit with a Bluetooth® phone allows
the user to conveniently make and
receive calls and use contacts.
Before using Bluetooth®, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driving practices and result in accidents. Refrain from excessive
operations while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driving, view the screen only for short
periods of time.

4 157

Features of your vehicle

When connecting a Bluetooth®
Phone
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to
see that the mobile phone supports Bluetooth® features.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth®, the phone will not be
found during device searches if the
phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth® power is turned
off. Disable the hidden state or turn
on the Bluetooth® power prior to
searching/connecting with the
Head unit.
• If you do not want automatic connection with your Bluetooth®
device, turn off the Bluetooth® feature within your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on the
mobile phone.

4 158

• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile
phone.
• Bluetooth®
connection
may
become intermittently disconnected in some mobile phones. Follow
these steps to try again.
1. Within the mobile phone, turn
the Bluetooth® function off/on
and try again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3. Reboot the audio system and try
again.
4. Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may differ depending on the model
of your mobile phone.

Features of your vehicle

Voice Recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation
of the voice recognition system,
pressing any key other than the
• For superior voice recognition performance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above
the head of the driver’s seat and
maintain a proper position when
saying commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the blower AC/heater is set
to high
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)

(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands
can be used only when a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone book,
it takes some times to convert the
phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a normal conversation.

4 159

Features of your vehicle

■ AUDIO

: AM1A0B2AN, AM1A0B2KN

PS34001N

4 160

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.

❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 6 to select the
desired mode.

Audio Head Unit

PS34001N

(1) RADIO
Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXMTM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3.

(2) MEDIA
Changes to USB(iPod®), AUX, My
Music, BT Audio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 5 to select the
desired mode.
(3) PHONE
Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.

SETUP

(4) CLOCK
Briefly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,
Clock, Phone, System setting modes
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Move to the Time setting screen
SEEK
(5) TRACK
Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.
USB, iPod®, My Music modes
- Briefly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Moves to next or previous song (file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards
the current song.
BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
previous song(file)
❈ The Play/Pause feature may operate differently depending on the
mobile phone.

4 161

Features of your vehicle

(6) PWR/VOL knob
Power : Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
Volume : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
(7) 1 ~ 6 (Preset)
Radio mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)
USB, iPod®, My Music mode
- 1 RPT : Repeat
- 2 RDM : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.

PS34001N

(8) DISP
Each time the button is pressed, it
sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟
Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.

(9) SCAN
Radio mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews
each broadcast for 5 seconds
each.
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broadcasts
saved in Preset 1 ~ 6 for 5
seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈ SAT Radio does not support the
Preset scan feature.
USB, My Music mode
- Briefly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
(10) MENU
Displays menus for the current mode.
❈ iPod List : Move to parent category

4 162

Features of your vehicle

(11) BACK
Go to previous depth(no previous
screen)
CAT

(12) FOLDER
Radio mode
- SiriusXMTM RADIO : Category
Search
- USB mode : Folder Search

(13) TUNE knob
AM/FM mode :
- Changes frequency by turning the
knob left/right.
SiriusXMTM Radio Mode:
- Changes the station by turning the
knob left/right. Press knob to
select station.
USB, iPod®, My Music mode:
- Searches songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right.
❈ When the desired song is displayed,
press the knob to play the song.
Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.

4 163

Features of your vehicle

SETUP

Mode Pop up

Display Settings

[Mode Pop up] Changes On / Off
selection mode
• During On state, press the RADIO
or MEDIA key to display the mode
change pop up screen.

Press the SETUP key Select [Display]
through
TUNE knob or 1 key
Select menu through
TUNE knob

Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

4 164

Features of your vehicle

SOUND SETTINGS
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound]
through
TUNE knob or 2 key
Select menu through
TUNE knob

Sound Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through
TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Back : While adjusting values,
pressing the
TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature will gradually increase
the volume as speed increases to
offset outside noise.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
[On/Off] of
TUNE knob

Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE knob

4 165

Features of your vehicle

CLOCK SETTINGS
SETUP

Press the
key Select [Clock]
through
TUNE knob or 3 key
Select menu through
TUNE knob
CLOCK

Sound Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press
TUNE knob

❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to the
next setting. (Set in order of
Year/Month/Day)

Time Format
This function is used to set the
12/24 hour time format of the
audio system. Select [Time
Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr through
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute]
and [AM/PM].

TUNE knob

Clock Display when Power is OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set
On / Off through
TUNE knob

Calendar Settings
This menu is used to set the date
(MM/DD/YYYY).
Select [Calendar Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

4 166

On
Off

: Displays time/date on screen
: Turn off.

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM SETTINGS
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[System]
Select menu through
TUNE knob

Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.

• Off : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When
using Expert mode, guidance
instructions can be heard through
the [Help] or [Menu] commands.

Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language]
Set through
TUNE knob

Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE knob
• On : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.

❈ The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈ Language support by region
- English, Francais, Espanol

4 167

Features of your vehicle

RADIO : FM, AM OR SIRIUSTM

Preset SEEK

SEEK

Press the
~
key
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from 1 ~ 6
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
1

SEEK
Press the TRACK
key
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Automatically searches
for the next station.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): While holding the key,
frequency changes without stopping. When the key is released,
automatically searches for the next
frequency from that point.

4 168

SCAN
Press the SCAN key
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequency
increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each. After
scanning all frequencies, returns
and plays the current broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 ~ 6
for 5 seconds each.

Selecting through manual
search
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• FM : Changes by 200KHz
• AM : Changes by 10KHz

Features of your vehicle

MENU
Within MENU key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.Store
Press the MENU key Set [A.Store]
through
TUNE knob or 1 key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to 1 ~ 6 keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.

4 169

Features of your vehicle
SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio information
Satellite Radio channels:
SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio offers
150+ channels with 100% commercial-free music, plus sports, news,
talk and entertainment, available
nationwide in your vehicle. For more
information and a complete list of
SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio channels,
visit www.siriusxm.com in the United
States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXMTM at 1-800-643-2112.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice buildup and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.

4 170

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense
tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio service:
SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts music, sports, news
and entertainment programming to
radio receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or factory
installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXMTM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXMTM music channels, and other
select channels over the Internet
using any computer connected to the
Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SiriusXMTM
at 1-866-635-2349.

NOTE:
All SiriusXMTM services require a
subscription, sold separately or
as a package, after 3-month trial
included with vehicle purchase or
lease. If you decide to continue
your SiriusXMTM service at the end
of your trial subscription, the plan
you choose will automatically
renew and bill at then-current
rates until you call us at 1-866635-2349 to cancel. See our
Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
Other fees and taxes apply. All
fees and programming are subject
to change. Sirius satellite service
is available only to those at least
18 and older in the 48 contiguous
USA, D.C., and PR (with coverage
limitations). Our Internet radio
service is available throughout
our satellite service area and in
AK and HI. Certain channels are
not available on our Internet radio
service or on mobile devices.
© 2013 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius,
XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of SiriusXMTM
Radio Inc. All rights reserved

Features of your vehicle

SiriusXMTM RADIO

Using SiriusXMTM Satellite
Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3
month complimentary period of
SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio so you
have access to over 220 channels of
music, information, and entertainment programming.

Activation

SEEK

In order to extend or reactivate your
subscription to SiriusXMTM Satellite
Radio, you will need to contact
SiriusXMTM Customer Care at 1-800643-2112. Have your 12 digit SID
(Sirius Identification Number) / ESN
(Electronic Serial Number) ready. To
retrieve the SID / ESN, turn on the
radio, press the [RADIO] button, and
tune to channel zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.

SEEK
Press the TRACK
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): select previous or next
channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): continuously move
to previous or next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.

4 171

Features of your vehicle

SCAN

Preset

Tune

Press the SCAN key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each broadcast for 10 seconds each
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.

1
Press the RADIO key
~ 6
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from 1 ~ 6
will save the current broadcast to
the selected key and sound a
BEEP.

• Rotate
TUNE knob : Changes
the channel number or scrolls category list.
• Press
TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.

Category
CAT
Press the
key Set
FOLDER
through the
TUNE knob
• The display will indicate the category menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press the
CAT
key to navigate category
FOLDER
list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈ If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
4 172

✽ Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or
unplugged. Please consult with your
Kia dealership.
2. Acquiring Signal
If this message is displayed, it means
that the antenna is covered and that
the SIRIUSTM Satellite Radio signal is
not available. Ensure the antenna is
uncovered and has a clear view of the
sky.

Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the MENU key
Select [ Info] through the TUNE
knob or 1 RPT key

Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.

Features of your vehicle

BASIC METHOD OF USE :
USB / iPod® / My Music
Press the MEDIA key to change the
mod mode in order of USB(iPod®) ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.

Repeat

Random

While song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
USB, iPod®, My Music mode: RPT on
screen
• To repeat one song (press the key)
: Repeats the current song.
USB mode: FLD.RPT on screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
❈ Press the 1 RPT key again to turn
off repeat.
1 RPT

While song (file) is playing 2 RDM
(RDM) key
My Music mode: RDM on screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
songs in random order.
USB mode: FLD.RDM on screen
• Folder Random (press the key) :
Plays all files within the current
folder in random order.
iPod® mode: ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (press the key) : Plays
all files in random order.
USB : ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays
all files in random order.
❈ Press the 2 RDM key again to turn
off random.

❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.

4 173

Features of your vehicle

Changing Song/File

Scan

While

While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all
songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not supported in iPod® mode.

song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
SEEK
❈ If the
key is pressed
TRACK
again within 2 second, the previous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
SEEK
TRACK

While

song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds) : Fast forwards the
song.
SEEK
TRACK

4 174

SCAN

Folder Search : USB Mode
CAT
While file is playing
FOLDER
(Folder Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
CAT
While file is playing
FOLDER
(Folder Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the
TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
❈ In iPod® mode, moves to the
Parent Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning
TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing
TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).

Features of your vehicle

MENU : USB
Press the USB mode
key to
set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random,
Information, and Copy features.
MENU

Folder Random

Information

Press the MENU key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 5
key to display information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.

Folder Repeat

Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.

Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT]
TUNE knob or 3
through the
key to repeat songs within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All Random
Press the MENU key Set [ A.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 4 key
to randomly play all songs within the
USB.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.

4 175

Features of your vehicle

Copy

MENU : iPod®

Press the
key Set [ Copy]
through the
TUNE knob or 6
key.
This is used to copy the current song
into My Music. You can play the
copied Music in My Music mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, iPod®, AUX) while
copying is in progress, copying is
canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
MENU

Information

In iPod mode, press the
key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
and Search features.
®

Search
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.

4 176

Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.

Press the MENU key Set [ Search]
through the
TUNE knob or 4
key.
Displays iPod® category list.
❈ Searching iPod® category is
MENU key pressed, move to parent category.

Features of your vehicle

MENU : My Music Mode

Random

Delete

In My Music mode, press the MENU
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.

Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.

Press the MENU key Set [ Delete]
through the
TUNE knob or 4
key.
• Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
• Deletes file from list

Information

Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.

➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the
TUNE knob.
➁ Press the MENU key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.

Delete All
Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or 5 key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.

4 177

Features of your vehicle

Delete Selection
Press the MENU key Set [
through the
TUNE knob
key.
Songs within My Music are
and deleted.
➀ Select the songs you
delete from the list.

Del.Sel]
or 6
selected
wish to

My Music

AUX

• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up
to 1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.

AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the MEDIA key to
change to AUX mode.

➁ After selecting, press MENU key
and select the delete menu.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.

AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.

4 178

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
AUDIO (if equipped)
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.

• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is
required to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned On .
❈ Setting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Audio Streaming :
Press the SETUP key Select
[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]
through the
TUNE knob Set
On

Off

4 179

Features of your vehicle

Starting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio

Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features

• Press the MEDIA key to change
the mode in order of USB➟AUX
➟My Music➟BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.

• Play / Stop
Press the
TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.

❈ The title / artist info may not be
supported in some mobile phone.
When it is not supported, no
title/no artist will be displayed.
• Previous / Next song
SEEK
SEEK
Press TRACK
or TRACK
to play
previous or next song.
❈ The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile
phones.

4 180

Features of your vehicle

PHONE(IF EQUIPPED)
Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone features
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If
you do not want automatic
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone
connection,
set
the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
power to OFF

Making a call using the
Steering-wheel mounted controls

(1)

MODE button : Mode changes
each time the button pressed.
(2) VOLUME button : Raises or lowers speaker volume.

(3)
/
button :
RADIO mode
- Briefly press the key: Move to
next or previous preset channel.
- Press and hold the key:
Automatically searches for
broadcast frequencies.
USB, iPod, My Music Modes
- Briefly press the key: Move to
next or previous song.
- Press and hold the key: Rewinds
or fast-forwards the current song.
(4)
button : Activates voice recognition.
(5)
button : Places and transfers
calls.
(6)
button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.

4 181

Features of your vehicle

• Check call history and making call
➀ Briefly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the
key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The call history list will be displayed on the screen.
➂ Press the
key again to connect a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
the
key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The most recently called number
is redialed.

4 182

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Device(if
equipped)
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology feature.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is
required to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology

Features of your vehicle

Pairing PHONE Key /
Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1.Press the PHONE key or the
key on the steering remote controller.
The following screen is displayed.

2.Select [OK] button to enter the Pair
Phone screen.

[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4.After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered. Enter the passkey “0000”
to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.

1)Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device

[SSP supported device]
4.After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Check the passkey on your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device and confirm.

3.From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
5.Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

4 183

Features of your vehicle

During the pairing process, make sure
that all connection requests on the
phone are accepted for phonebook
download and to allow acceptance of all
future connection requests. " and "Visit
http://www.kia.com/us/#/bluetooth for
additional information on pairing your
Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, and
to view a phone compatibility list.

• If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
PHONE key or the
key on the
steering wheel displays the following screen. Select [Pair] button to
pair a new device or select
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.

4 184

Features of your vehicle

Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the SETUP key
Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob

1. The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
features supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some features
may not be supported depending
on your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth® device can be
connected at a time.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device can be connected at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is connected.

• Only
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
Handsfree
and
Bluetooth audio related features
are supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of
communication range, turning the
device OFF, or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology communication
error,
corresponding
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices
are
automatically
searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon resetting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device, the system will
be restored.
4 185

Features of your vehicle

• After pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.

Connecting a Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]

1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected

4 186

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].

Features of your vehicle

Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.

From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.

• Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priority phone.

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]

4 187

Features of your vehicle

Disconnecting a Device

Deleting a Device

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.

4 188

• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.

Features of your vehicle

USING Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology(if equipped)
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the PHONE key to display the Phone
menu screen.

1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently
used contacts saved for easy
access.
2) Call History : Displays the call history list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.

• If you select the [Call History] button but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.

Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press
key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.

1) Caller : Displays the other caller's
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number

4 189

Features of your vehicle

• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.

Favorites
Press the
[Favorites]

Call History
PHONE

key

Select

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.

4 190

Press the
History]

PHONE

key

Select [Call

A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call history stored or a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not stored
in Call History.

Features of your vehicle

Contacts
Press the
[Contacts]

PHONE

key Select

The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the MENU key.

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded data is maintained even if
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device has been disconnected.
(However, the contacts and call history saved to the phone will be deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.

• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the contact download feature has been
turned off within the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may
require device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts. If
downloading does not normally
occur, check the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device settings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more information of supported Bluetooth®
devices and function support, refer
to your phone’s user manual.

4 191

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Setting
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is
required to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology

Pairing a New Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section within Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.

Viewing Paired Phone List
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]

This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section within
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

Features of your vehicle

1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connection priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded

Downloading Contacts
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

Outgoing Volume
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.

Use
TUNE knob to adjust the outgoing volume level.

• Upon downloading phone contacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being downloaded.

• While on a call, the volume can be
SEEK
changed by using the
TRACK
key.

4 193

Features of your vehicle

Turning Bluetooth System Off
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology is turned off, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.

Wireless
• To turn Bluetooth®
Technology back on, go to SETUP
[Phone] and select “Yes”.

4 194

Features of your vehicle

VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the
key on the
steering wheel. Say a command

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to SETUP [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
• For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruction and beep tone.

Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stated Shortly press the
key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the
key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
command.

4 195

Features of your vehicle

ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the
key on the
steering remote controller
• While using voice command,
pressing any steering wheel control or a different key will end voice
command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold
the
key on the steering wheel
to end voice command.

4 196

Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Kia Voice Recognition System
may have difficulty understanding
some accents or uncommon
names.
When
using
Voice
Recognition to place a call, speak in
a moderate tone, with clear pronunciation
To maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guidelines when storing contacts:
• Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
always use full names (including
first and last names) for these contacts
• Do not use special characters
(e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County
Finance Department" instead of
"C. F. D."; Be sure to say the name
exactly as it is entered in the contacts list

• Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
• If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a more
descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).

Features of your vehicle

Illustration on using voice commands

More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.

• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds):
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)

Beep~
More Help

• End voice command.
Briefly pressing the

• Skipping Prompt Messages
Briefly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds):
Please say a...

key (under 0.8 seconds):

Please say a command
after the beep (BEEP)

Contacts.
Please say the name of the contact you want
to call.

Cancel

while guidance message is being stated

Briefly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)

(BEEP)

Contacts

Beep Beep.. (end beep)

More Help

4 197

Features of your vehicle

Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command
More Help
Help
Call
Call
on Mobile
Call
in Office
Call
at Home
Call
on Other
Phone

Favorites
Call History

4 198

Function
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Calls saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Display the Favorite screen.
Displays the Call History screen.

Command
Contacts

Dial Number

Redial
Tutorial

Radio

FM1(FM One)
FM2(FM Two)
AM

Function
Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Connects the most recently called number.
Provide guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth® connections
• When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟
SAT2➟SAT3➟FM1)
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
• When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
Displays the FM1 screen.
Displays the FM2 screen.
Displays the AM screen.

Features of your vehicle

Command
FM Preset 1~6

Function
Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
SiriusXMTM
• When currently listening to the SiriusXMTM,
maintains the current state.
(Satellite)
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXMTM screen.
SiriusXMTM(Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXMTM screen.
1~3

Command
Function
My Music
Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary)
Plays the connected external device.
®
Bluetooth Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
device.
Please repeat
Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute
Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit)
Ends voice command.

SiriusXMTM Channel Plays the selected SiriusXMTM channel.
0~223
Media
USB
iPod®

Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Plays USB music.
Plays iPod® music.

4 199

Features of your vehicle

• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during
FM, AM radio operation.
Command
Preset 1~6
Scan
Preset Scan
Information

4 200

Function
Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Displays the information of the current broadcast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)

• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command
Channel 0~223
Scan
Preset 1~6
Information

Function
Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Displays the information of the current broadcast.

Features of your vehicle

• USB commands: Commands available during USB
operation.
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Information
Next Folder
Previous Folder

Function
Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeats the current file.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Play the first file in the next folder.
Play the first file in the previous folder.

• iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod®
operation.
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off

Function
Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.
Repeats the current song.
Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.

4 201

Features of your vehicle

• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation.
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Delete

4 202

Function
Randomly plays all saved files.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeats the current file.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation.
Command
Play
Pause

Function
Plays the currently paused song.
Pauses the current song.

Features of your vehicle

SiriusXM™ service requires a subscription, sold
separately, after 3-month trial included with vehicle
purchase. If you decide to continue your
SiriusXM™ service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically
renew and bill at then-current rates until you call us
at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See our Customer
Agreement
for
complete
terms
at
www.siriusxm.com. Other fees and taxes apply. All
fees and programming are subject to change.
Sirius satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA, D.C.,
and PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout our satellite
service area and in AK and HI. Certain channels are
not available on our Internet radio service or on
mobile devices. SiriusXM Traffic available in select
markets. See siriusxm.com/traffic for more information. © 2013 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. iPod® is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital device sold separately. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Kia is under license.
A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth® wireless technology. All rights
reserved.

4 203

Driving your vehicle
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Illuminated engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Engine start/stop button position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
• Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
• Parking brake - Hand type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
• Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
• To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
• To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• To decrease the cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise
control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . . 5-40
• To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
• To turn cruise control off, do one of the following. . . 5-41

Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
• Active ECO operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
• When Active ECO is activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
• Limitation of Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
• Auto stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
• Auto start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
• Condition of ISG system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
• ISG system deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• ISG system malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

• Snowy or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-56
• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Don’t let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-57
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Driving your vehicle

E010000AUN-EU

Be sure the exhaust system
does not leak.
The exhaust system should be
checked whenever the vehicle is
raised to change the oil or for any
other purpose. If you hear a change
in the sound of the exhaust or if you
drive over something that strikes the
underneath side of the vehicle, have
the exhaust system checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.

WARNING - Open tailgate
Do not drive with the tailgate
open. Poisonous exhaust gases
can enter the passenger compartment If you must drive with
the tailgate open proceed as follows:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan
at the highest speed.

WARNING - Engine
exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in a
enclosed area for a prolonged
time. Exhaust fumes contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless gas that can cause
unconsciousness and death by
asphyxiation.

5 3

Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle

Necessary inspections

• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.

Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, at the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in chapter 7,
“Maintenance”.

5 4

WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control, that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.

WARNING - Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on,
be careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. It may overheat
the engine or exhaust system
and cause fire.

WARNING - Loose
objects
Securely store items in your
vehicle. When you make a sudden stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.

WARNING
- Check surroundings
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).

WARNING - Driving while
intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is dangerous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous
as or more dangerous than driving drunk.

5 5

Driving your vehicle
KEY POSITIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated ignition switch

Ignition switch position
LOCK

OPS053001

Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will illuminate for your
convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the ON position. The
light will go off immediately when the
ignition switch is turned on. It will
also go off after about 30 seconds
when the door is closed.

5 6

OXM059029N

The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft (if equipped). The ignition key can be removed only in the
LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, push the key
inward at the ACC position and turn
the key toward the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position,
turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the
tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.

Driving your vehicle

START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position. The brake warning light can
be checked in this position.

WARNING - Ignition
switch
Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle
is moving. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.

The anti-theft steering column lock (if
equipped) is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in 1st gear for the
manual transaxle or P (Park) for
automatic transaxle, set the parking
brake fully and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these precautions are not taken.

Starting the engine

WARNING - Proper
footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots,etc.) may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedal.
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the
clutch pedal and brake pedal
depressed while turning the ignition switch to the start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.

5 7

Driving your vehicle

3.Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
4.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)

CAUTION - Starter
If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position. If traffic and
road conditions permit, you may
put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the
vehicle is still moving and turn
the ignition switch to the START
position in an attempt to restart
the engine.

5 8

Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.

WARNING - Steering
wheel
Never reach for any controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control.

Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated ENGINE
START/STOP button

ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF

Not illuminated

OPS053003

Whenever the front door is opened,
the ENGINE START/STOP button
will illuminate for your convenience.
The light will go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed.
When all entrances are closed, if you
lock the vehicle by using the transmitter or the smart key, the light will
go off immediately.

• With manual transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON position), stop the vehicle then press the
engine start/stop button.

In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still
moving, you can restart the engine
without depressing the brake pedal
by
pressing
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.

• With automatic transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON position),
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position. When
you
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will
not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.

5 9

Driving your vehicle

ACC(Accessory)

Amber

START/RUN

Redish orange

• With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button
when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the clutch
pedal.

• With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button
when the button is in the ACC position without depressing the clutch
pedal.

• With automatic transaxle
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the OFF position
without depressing the brake pedal.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than
1 hour, the button is turned off automatically to prevent battery discharge.

• With automatic transaxle
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the ACC position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.

5 10

Not illuminated

• With manual transaxle
To start the engine, depress the
clutch pedal and brake pedal, then
press the engine start/stop button
with the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
• With automatic transaxle
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the ENGINE
START/ STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) or the N
(Neutral) position. For your safety,
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.

Driving your vehicle

If
you
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP
button
without
depressing the clutch pedal for manual transaxle vehicles or without
depressing the brake pedal for automatic transaxle vehicles, the engine
will not start and the ENGINE
START/STOP button changes as follow:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC

✽ NOTICE
If you leave the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ACC or ON
position for a long time, the battery
will discharge.

WARNING
- Starting vehicle
Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion except in an
emergency. If the engine stops
while the vehicle is in motion,
this would result in loss of
directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.

Starting the engine with a
smart key (if equipped)
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3.Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the
clutch pedal and brake pedal
depressed while starting the engine.
Automatic transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while depressing the brake
pedal.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
5.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
5 11

Driving your vehicle

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC position or
above, if any door is opened, the
system checks for the smart key. If
the smart key is not in the vehicle,
a message "key is not in the vehicle" will appear on the LCD display.
And if all doors are closed, the
chime will sound for 5 seconds.
The indicator or warning will turn
off while the vehicle is moving.
Always have the smart key with
you.

5 12

CAUTION - Starter
If the engine stalls while the
vehicle is in motion, do not
attempt to move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position. If the
traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position while
the vehicle is still moving and
press the ENGINE START/STOP
button in an attempt to restart
the engine.

WARNING - Unintended
vehicle movement
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar
with the vehicle operation.
Pushing
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
smart key is in the vehicle may
result in unintended engine
activation and/or unintended
vehicle movement.

Driving your vehicle

OPS053007

• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
it is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 10 seconds while it is in the ACC position. The engine can start without
depressing the brake pedal. But for
your safety always depress the
brake pedal before starting the
engine.
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse
is blown.

5 13

Driving your vehicle
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Manual transaxle operation

The shift lever can be moved without
pushing the ring (1).
The ring (1) must be pushed while
moving the shift lever.
OJD053058

5 14

• The manual transaxle has 6 forward gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on
the shift knob. The transaxle is fully
synchronized in all forward gears
so shifting to either a higher or a
lower gear is easily accomplished.
• Press the clutch pedal down fully
while shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an
ignition lock switch, the engine will
not start when starting the engine
without depressing the clutch
pedal. (if equipped)
• The gearshift lever must be
returned to the neutral position
before shifting into R (Reverse).
The ring (1) located immediately
below the shift knob must be pulled
upward while moving the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) position. (if
equipped)

• Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

CAUTION - Downshifting
Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear
when the engine is running at
high speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such a downshifting may
damage the engine.

Driving your vehicle

• During cold weather, shifting may
be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the
transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop
and it's hard to shift into 1st or R
(Reverse), put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) position and release the
clutch. Press the clutch pedal back
down, and then shift into 1st or R
(Reverse) gear position.

CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch
wear and damage, do not
drive with your foot resting on
the clutch pedal. Also, don’t
use the clutch to hold the
vehicle stopped on an uphill
grade, while waiting for a traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as
this can result in premature
wear of the transaxle shift
forks.

WARNING
- Incline parking
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then
make sure the transaxle is shifted
into 1st gear when the vehicle is
parked on a level or uphill grade,
and shifted into R (Reverse) on a
downhill grade. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are not
followed in the order identified.

Using the clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the
way to the floor before shifting, then
released slowly. The clutch pedal
should always be fully released while
driving. Do not rest your foot on the
clutch pedal while driving. This can
cause unnecessary wear. Do not
partially engage the clutch to hold
the vehicle on an incline. This causes
unnecessary wear. Use the foot
brake or parking brake to hold the
vehicle on an incline. Do not operate
the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

CAUTION
When operating the clutch
pedal, depress the clutch pedal
down fully. If you don’t depress
the clutch pedal fully, the clutch
may be damaged or noise may
occur.

5 15

Driving your vehicle

Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or while driving up steep hills,
downshift before the engine starts to
labor. Downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling and gives better
acceleration when you again need to
increase your speed. When the vehicle is traveling down steep hills,
downshifting helps maintain safe
speed and prolongs brake life.

5 16

Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This is
extremely hazardous. Always leave
the vehicle in gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear. When you
do this, engine braking will help
slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. This will help avoid
over-revving the engine, which can
cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter
cross winds. This gives you much
better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into reverse. The transaxle can be
damaged if you do not. To shift into
reverse, depress the clutch, move
the shift lever to neutral, then shift
to the reverse position.

• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
the vehicle to go out of control.
• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an
unbelted occupant is significantly
more likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted
occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering
or turning. High speed cornering
and turning increase the risk of
vehicle rollover. Rollover accidents
are violent and unpredictable.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.

Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Automatic transaxle operation
+ (UP)

The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically, depending on the
position of the shift lever.
- ( D OW N )

✽ NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).

Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.
However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle.)
Press the lock release button when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
OPS053008

5 17

Driving your vehicle

For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting from N (Neutral) to
a forward or reverse gear.

WARNING - Leaving the
vehicle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Do not use
the P position in place of the
parking brake. Always make
sure the shift lever is latched in
the P position and set the parking brake fully. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are
not followed.

5 18

CAUTION - Transaxle
To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the
brakes on. The transaxle may be
damaged if you shift into P
(Park) while the vehicle is in
motion.
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with the engine
power. Use the service brake or the
parking brake.

Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transaxle and prevents the drive wheels from rotating.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.

CAUTION - Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking
the vehicle” explained in this
section.

N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transaxle will automatically downshift to the next lower
gear.

+ (UP)

- ( D OW N )

Sports mode
OPS053009

Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
sports mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.

5 19

Driving your vehicle

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
• In sports mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care to
keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)
position as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle
stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift automatically.
(Continued)

5 20

(Continued)
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving
on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.

Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
into R (Reverse):
1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2.Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3.Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. It is a normal condition.

Driving your vehicle

Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position. Even if the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position, the
key also cannot be removed.
If your vehicle is equipped with
ENGINE START/STOP button, the
button will not change to the OFF
position unless the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.

WARNING - Shifting from
part
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the vehicle.
OPS053010

Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following:
1.Carefully remove the cap covering
the shift-lock access hole (1).
2.Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3.Move the shift lever.
4.Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.

5 21

Driving your vehicle

Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever
from P (Park) to any other position
with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into
P (Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.

5 22

Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on
a steep hill, the vehicle may have a
tendency to roll backwards.
Shifting the shift lever into 2
(Second Gear) will help prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards.

Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

WARNING - Brake Pedal
Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. This will create abnormally high brake temperatures which can cause excessive brake lining and pad wear.

WARNING - Steep hill
braking
Avoid continuous application of
the brakes when descending a
long or steep hill by shifting to a
lower gear. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking performance.

Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Applying the
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water.
To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.

5 23

Driving your vehicle

In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping distance, however, will be much greater
than normal.

WARNING - Parking
brake
Applying the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving at
normal speeds can cause a
sudden loss of control of the
vehicle. If you must use the
parking brake to stop the vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.

5 24

Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes. You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.

WARNING - Brake wear
Avoid applying the parking brake
to stop the vehicle while it is moving except in an emergency situation. If you ignore this audible
warning, you will eventually lose
braking performance, which
could lead to a serious accident.

Driving your vehicle

Parking brake - Hand type
Applying the parking brake

CAUTION- Parking brake

Releasing the parking brake

Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.

OPS053012
OPS053011

To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then without
pressing the release button in, pull
the parking brake lever up as far as
possible.
In addition it is recommended that
when parking the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever should be positioned in the appropriate low gear on
manual transaxle vehicles or in the P
(Park) position for automatic
transaxle vehicles.

To release the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and pull up the
parking brake lever slightly. Secondly
press the release button (1) and
lower the parking brake lever (2)
while holding the button.

5 25

Driving your vehicle

If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.

WARNING - Parking brake
use
All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
W-75

Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction in the brake
system. Immediate attention is necessary.

5 26

Driving your vehicle

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though
vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The vehicle
should be driven at reduced speeds
in the following circumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving with tire chains
installed
• When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has different surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increase
the stopping distance for your vehicle.

The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation allows the ABS to
control the force being delivered to
the brakes.

✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system, your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.

5 27

Driving your vehicle

W-78

The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through selfdiagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with
your ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.

5 28

• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and have operated your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be active
continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehicle over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light goes off, then your
ABS system is normal. Otherwise,
you may have a problem with the
ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.

✽ NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS has malfunctioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

Electronic stability control
(ESC)

OPS053013

The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.

Electronic stability control (ESC) will
not prevent accidents. Excessive
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers
and hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious accidents.
Only a safe and attentive driver can
prevent accidents by avoiding
maneuvers that cause the vehicle to
lose traction. Even with ESC
installed, always follow all the normal
precautions for driving - including
driving at safe speeds for the conditions.

The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse
conditions. It is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ESC is active.

✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control System is functioning properly.
5 29

Driving your vehicle

ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.

5 30

When operating
When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operating properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or driving on a slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm
(revolutions per minute) to
increase.

ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.

Driving your vehicle

■ ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light

OPS053022

OPS053023

• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF
)
shortly (ESC OFF indicator light
(ESC OFF
) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control function
does not operate. It means the traction control function does not operate. Brake control function only operates.
If your vehicle is equipped with cluster type B, a message also will
appear on the LCD display.

• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for
more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime will
sound. At this state, the engine control function and brake control function do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not
operate any more.
If your vehicle is equipped with cluster type B, a message also will
appear on the LCD display.

Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if the ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.

5 31

Driving your vehicle

CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. When
replacing tires, make sure they
are the same size as your original tires.

WARNING
- Electronic stability control
Drive carefully even though
your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control. It can only
assist you in maintaining control under certain circumstances.

5 32

ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.

WARNING - Operating
ESC
Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating (ESC
indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.

✽ NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated). If the ESC is left on,
it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and result in false
diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not
affect ABS or brake system operation.

Driving your vehicle

Vehicle stability management
(VSM)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehicle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detects changes in coefficient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.

VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC
indicator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability management is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle
and/or abnormal steering responses
(EPS). This is only the effect of brake
and EPS control and indicates nothing unusual.

The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient or incline
• Driving in reverse
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster

VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.

Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if
you don’t cancel the VSM operation
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
indicates that a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
Electric Power Steering system or
VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light
remains on, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.

✽ NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 13 mph (22
km/h) on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 6 mph (10
km/h) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu road. The split-mu road
is made of surfaces which have different friction forces.

5 33

Driving your vehicle

• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a supplementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check
the speed and the distance to the
vehicle ahead. Always hold the
steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate
according to the driver’s intention,
even with installed VSM. Always
follow all the normal precautions
for driving at safe speeds for the
conditions – including driving in
clement weather and on a slippery
road.

5 34

Hill-start assist control (HAC)
A vehicle has the tendency to roll
back on a steep hill when it starts to
go after stopping. The Hill-start
Assist Control (HAC) prevents the
vehicle from rolling back by applying
the brakes automatically for about 2
seconds. The brakes are released
when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
The HAC is activated only for about 2
seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the accelerator pedal.

WARNING - Maintaining
Brake Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need
to apply brakes while stopped
on an incline. While stopped,
make sure you maintain brake
pressure sufficient to prevent
your vehicle from rolling backward and causing an accident.
Don’t release the brake pedal
until you are ready to accelerate
forward.

Driving your vehicle

Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and the parking
brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one
side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at
all times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be dangerous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle). If
your vehicle is facing downhill, turn
the front wheels into the curb to
help keep the vehicle from rolling. If
your vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to
keep the vehicle from rolling, block
the wheels.

5 35

Driving your vehicle

• Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the
engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal. This can cause the transaxle
to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.

5 36

Driving your vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OPS053015

1. Cruise indicator
2. Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without pressing the
accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (20
mph).

• If the cruise control is left on
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated), the
cruise control can be switched on
accidentally. Keep the cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the cruise control
is not in use, to avoid inadvertently
setting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways
in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on
slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6%
up-hill or down-hill roads.

✽ NOTICE
• During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. The delay is
normal.

WARNING - Misuse of
Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control if the
traffic situation does not allow
you to drive safely at a constant
speed and with sufficient distance to the vehicle in front.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condition.

5 37

Driving your vehicle

Cruise control switch

To set cruise control speed:

OPS053018
OPS053016

OPS053017

CRUISE : Turns cruise control system on or off.
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control
operation.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control speed.

1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 30 km/h
(20 mph)

✽ NOTICE - Manual transaxle
For manual transaxle vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at
least once to set the cruise control
after starting the engine.
5 38

3. Push the SET - switch, and
release it at the desired speed.
The SET indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
Release the accelerator pedal at
the same time. The desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.

Driving your vehicle

To increase cruise control set
speed:

To decrease the cruising
speed:

To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.

OPS053019

OPS053018

Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the RES + switch and hold it.
Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Push the RES + switch and
release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase by
2km/h (or 1 mph) each time you
move the lever up (to RES+) in this
manner.

Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the SET - switch and hold it.
Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Push the SET - switch and release
it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
by 2 km/h (1 mph) each time you
move the lever down (to SET-) in
this manner.

5 39

Driving your vehicle

To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:

Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, push the
RES + switch located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed.

To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 30
km/h (20 mph):

OPS053020

• Press the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal if
equipped with a manual transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic transaxle.
• Push the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by approximately 20 km/h (12 mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 km/h (15
mph).
5 40

OPS053019

If any method other than the
CRUISE button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when the
RES+ switch is pushed.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).

Driving your vehicle

To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:

OPS053017

• Press the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.

5 41

Driving your vehicle
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
• When the Active ECO is activated,
it will remain on until the Active
ECO button is pressed again.
Active ECO does not turn off when
the engine is restarted. To turn off
Active ECO, press the Active ECO
button again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, the system will return to normal mode.

Active ECO operation

When Active ECO is activated:
OPS053030

Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency by controlling certain engine
and transaxle system operating
parameters. Fuel efficiency depends
on the driver's driving habit and road
condition.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green)
will illuminate to show that the
Active ECO is operating.

5 42

• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced eventhough you depress
the accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited.
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the active eco system is activated to improve fuel efficiency.

Limitation of Active ECO operation:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low: The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill: The system
will be limited to gain power when
driving uphill because the engine
torque is restricted.
• When using sports mode: The system will be limited according to the
shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few seconds: The system will be limited,
judging that the driver wants to
speed up.

Driving your vehicle
ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
the ISG system, which reduces fuel
consumption by automatically shutting down the engine, when the vehicle is at a standstill. (For example :
red light, stop sign and traffic jam)
The engine starts automatically as
soon as the starting conditions are
met.
The ISG system is ON whenever the
engine is running.

Auto stop
To stop the engine in idle stop
mode
■ Type A

✽ NOTICE
When the engine automatically
starts by the ISG system, some
warning lights (ABS, ESC, ESC
OFF, EPS or Parking brake warning light) may turn on for a few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system
is malfunctioning.

You must reach a speed of at least
5 mph (8 km/h) since last idle stop.
The engine will stop and the green
AUTO STOP indicator ( ) on the
instrument cluster will illuminate.

OPS053028
■ Type B

OPS053029

Stop the vehicle completely by
pressing the brake pedal.

5 43

Driving your vehicle

Auto start

OPS053014
OTF054124

If your vehicle is equipped with cluster type B, a message "Auto Stop"
also will appear on the LCD display.

OPS053024

If you open the engine hood in auto
stop mode, the ISG system will deactivate (the light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate). A message "Auto
Stop Deactivated Start Manually" will
appear on the LCD display. (if
equipped)
Turn the engine on manually.
5 44

To restart the engine from idle
stop mode
• Release the brake pedal.
or
• Move the shift gear to the R
(Reverse) position or the sports
mode while depressing the brake
pedal.
The engine will start and the green
AUTO STOP indicator ( ) on the
instrument cluster will go out.

Driving your vehicle

The engine will also restart automatically without the driver’s any
actions if the following occurs:
- When a certain amount of time has
passed with the climate control system on.
- When the front defroster is on.
- The brake vaccum pressure is low.
- The battery charging status is low.
- The vehicle speed exceeds 1 MPH
(1 km/h).
- The fan speed is in the highest
position when the air conditioning is
on.
- Engine is turned off by Auto Stop
for a long time.
- If you unfasten the seat belt or open
the driver's door while depressing
the brake pedal.

Condition of ISG system operation

OPS053025

The green AUTO STOP indicator
( ) on the instrument cluster will
blink for 5 seconds and a message
“Auto Start” will appear on the LCD
display (if equipped).

The ISG system will operate
under the following condition:
- The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
- The driver’s door and engine hood
are closed.
- The brake vaccum pressure is adequate.
- The battery is sufficiently charged.
- The outside temperature is more
than -2°C (28.4°F).
- The outside temperature is under
32°C (89.6°F).
- The engine coolant temperature is
not low.

5 45

Driving your vehicle

ISG system deactivation

OPS053026

• If the ISG system does not meet
the operation condition, the ISG
system is deactivated. The light on
the ISG OFF button will illuminate
and a message “Auto Stop
Conditions not met” will appear on
the LCD display (if equipped).
• If the light or notice comes on continuously, please check the operation condition.

OPS053014

OPS053027

• If you want to deactivate the ISG
system, press the ISG OFF button.
The light on the ISG OFF button
will illuminate and a message “Auto
Stop off” will appear on the LCD
display (if equipped).
5 46

• If you press the ISG OFF button
again, the system will be activated
and the light on the ISG OFF button will turn off.

Driving your vehicle

ISG system malfunction
The system may not operate
when:

• If the ISG OFF button light is not
turned off by pressing the ISG OFF
button again or if the ISG system
continuously does not work correctly, please contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING - Engine repair
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (OFF) position or remove
the key from the ignition completely before performing work
on the vehicle in the engine
area. Failure to do so could
result in serious injuries due to
sudden engine reactivation.
✽ NOTICE

OPS053014

- If the ISG related sensors or system error occurs, the yellow AUTO
STOP indicator ( ) on the instrument cluster will stay on after blinking for 5 seconds and the light on
the ISG OFF button will illuminate.

If the AGM battery is reconnected
or replaced, ISG function will not
operate immediately.
If you want to use the ISG function,
the battery sensor needs to be calibrated for approximately 4 hours
with the ignition off and then, turn
the engine on and off 2 or 3 times.

5 47

Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate
your vehicle as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jackrabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
5 48

• Don't "ride" the brake or clutch
pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear
on these components. In addition,
driving with your foot resting on the
brake pedal may cause the brakes
to overheat, which reduces their
effectiveness and may lead to
more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.

• Keep your vehicle in good condition. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
section 7. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see section 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle. Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.

Driving your vehicle

• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warmup period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a
very high gear resulting in engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speed.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for economy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off
during motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. In addition,
turning off the ignition while
driving could engage the steering wheel lock resulting in loss
of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for engine
braking effect.

5 49

Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.

5 50

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other nonslip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when
stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

WARNING - Downshifting
Do not downshift with an automatic transaxle while driving on
slippery surfaces. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid and
result in an accident.

Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Crossover Utility
Vehicle (CUV). CUV’s have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of the higher ground
clearance is a better view of the
road, which allows you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger vehicles,
any more than low-slung sports vehicles are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Due to
this risk, driver and passengers are
strongly recommended to buckle
their seat belts. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted person is more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. There are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.

Driving your vehicle

WARNING - Replacement
tires
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in the tire
section
of
the
manual.
Installation of variant tires can
affect the safety and performance of your vehicle.

Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between 1st (First) and R
(Reverse) in vehicles equipped with
a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic
transaxle. Do not race the engine,
and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few
tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a
tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the
transaxle.

CAUTION- Vehicle rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire damage.
CAUTION- Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 56
km/h (35 mph). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.

5 51

Driving your vehicle

The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

Smooth cornering

Driving at night

WARNING
- Sudden vehicle movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle if people or objects are nearby. The vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backwards as
it becomes unstuck.

5 52

OUN056051

OCM053010

Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.

Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.

Driving your vehicle

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed. (On vehicles not
equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature.) Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

1VQA3003

Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.

Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
5 53

Driving your vehicle

Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.

Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.

5 54

WARNING - Under/over
inflated tires
Always check the tires for proper
inflation
before
driving.
Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death.
For proper tire pressures, refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 8.

WARNING - Tire tread
Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible. For further information
and tread limits, refer to "Tires
and wheels" in section 7.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both the engine coolant
and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.

Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
Snowy or icy conditions

1VQA3005

Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires
equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications,
and sharp turns are potentially very
hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur. You
need to keep sufficient distance
between the vehicle in operation in
front of your vehicle. Also, apply the
brake gently.

Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

5 55

Driving your vehicle

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant

Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary

Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.

In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.

Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer or a service
station.

5 56

Check spark plugs and ignition system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.

To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an
authorized Kia dealer and most auto
parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
as these may damage the paint finish.

Driving your vehicle
TRAILER TOWING
Don’t let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.
If there is a risk the parking brake
may freeze, apply it only temporarily
while you put the gear shift lever in P
(Park, automatic transaxle) or in first
or reverse gear (manual transaxle)
and block the rear wheels so the
vehicle cannot roll. Then release the
parking brake.

Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.

We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.

Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
vehicle to be sure the movement of
the front wheels and the steering
components are not obstructed.

5 57

Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
Tire and loading information label

OPS053100N/OPS053104N/OPS053102N/OPS053101N/OPS053103N/OPS053105N

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity
weight.

5 58

Driving your vehicle

Vehicle capacity weight:
375 kg (827 lbs.)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:
Total - 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.

5 59

Driving your vehicle

Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

5 60

Steps for determining correct
load limit
1.Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's placard.
2.Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3.Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4.The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg
(1400 lbs.) and there will be five 68
kg (150 lbs.) passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (650 lbs).
(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or
1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5.Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6.If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

Example 1

Example 2

C190F01JM

Item
A
B

Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
635 kg
Weight
(1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
136 kg
Weight
(300 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2
Available Cargo and 499 kg
Luggage weight (1100 lbs)

Example 3

C190F02JM

Item
A
B

Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
635 kg
Weight
(1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
340 kg
Weight
(750 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5
Available Cargo and 295 kg
Luggage weight (650 lbs)

C
C190F03JM

Item
A
B

Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
635 kg
Weight
(1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
390 kg
Weight
(860 lbs)
78 kg (172 lbs) × 5
Available Cargo and 245 kg
Luggage weight (540 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.

5 61

Driving your vehicle

Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pillar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.

5 62

WARNING - Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle and
vehicle
capacity
weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

WARNING - Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure, increased stopping distances and poor vehicle handling all of which may result in a
crash.

✽ NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

WARNING - Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sudden stop or crash.

5 63

Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the certification
label:

Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR
(Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the certification label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

5 64

This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR
(Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.

What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit) . . 6-18

• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
• Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
• Distributing the sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
• Checking the tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
• Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . 6-23
• Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

In case of an emergency while driving . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
If you have a flat tire (with Spare Tire) . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Use of temporary compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
• Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

What to do in an emergency
ROAD WARNING
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.

Hazard warning flasher

OPS063001

The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme
caution
when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.

6 2

• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.

What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of control.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on a firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.

2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P (Park, automatic
transaxle) or reverse (manual
transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in this
section.

If the engine stalls while driving
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized Kia dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.

✽ NOTICE
If there was a check engine light and
loss of power or stall and if safe to do
so to wait at least 10 seconds to
restart the vehicle after it stalls. This
may reset the car so it will no longer
run at low power (limp home) condition.

6 3

What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1.If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2.Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is discharged.
4.Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tightened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".

6 4

WARNING - Push/pull
start
Do not push or pull the vehicle
to start it. Push or pull starting
may cause the catalytic converter to overload and create a
fire hazard.

If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1.Check the fuel level.
2.With the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, check all connectors at the ignition coils and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3.Check the fuel line in the engine
compartment.
4.If the engine still does not start, call
an authorized Kia dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.

What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jump starting

Jumper Cables

(-)

(+)

(-)
(+)
Booster
battery

Discharged
battery
1VQA4001

Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow these jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing service jump start your vehicle.

WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode causing serious injury.

WARNING
CAUTION- 12 volt battery
Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).

- Frozen batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte
level is low as the battery may
rupture or explode.

6 5

What to do in an emergency

WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery
produces hydrogen gas which
will explode if exposed to flame
or sparks.

WARNING - Sulfuric acid
risk
When jump starting your vehicle be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle. Automobile batteries
contain sulfuric acid. This is
poisonous and highly corrosive.

6 6

Jump starting procedure
1.Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative terminal is grounded.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
come in contact.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4.Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal of the booster
battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative
terminal of the booster battery (3),
then the other end to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for example,
the engine lifting bracket) away
from the battery (4). Do not connect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

WARNING - Battery
cables
Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal
of the booster battery to the
negative terminal of the discharged battery. This can cause
the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.
5.Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

What to do in an emergency

Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle lock system cannot be
push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.

WARNING- Tow starting
vehicle
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.

6 7

What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine will probably be
too hot. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P (Park,
automatic transaxle) or Neutral
(manual transaxle) and set the
parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is coming out from underneath the hood,
stop the engine. Do not open the
hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam,
leave the engine running and
check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not
running, turn the engine off.

6 8

4.Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or
under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining
from it when you stop).

WARNING - Uncler the
hood
While the engine is running,
keep hair, hands and clothing
away from moving parts such
as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury.
5.If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking
out, stop the engine immediately
and call the nearest authorized Kia
dealer for assistance.

WARNING- Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This
may result in coolant being
blown out of the opening and
cause serious burns.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.

What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jack and tools (if equipped)

Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing
tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road
or highway.

WARNING - Tire Jack
OPS063003

The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment.
Pull up the luggage box cover to
reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

Do not place any portion of your
body under a vehicle that is
only supported by a jack since
the vehicle can easily roll off the
jack. Use vehicle support
stands.

6 9

What to do in an emergency

• Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto the shoulder before trying to change a tire.
The jack should be used on a firm
level ground. If you cannot find a
firm, level place off the road, call a
towing service company for assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any
other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
• Do not allow anyone to remain in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Make sure any children present
are in a secure place away from
the road and from the vehicle to be
raised with the jack.

WARNING - Running
vehicle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack.

6 10

Removing and storing the
spare tire (if equipped)

Changing tires

1VQA4022
OAM069008

Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.

1.Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2.Place the transaxle shift lever in R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle or
P (Park) with automatic transaxle.
3.Activate the hazard warning flashers.

What to do in an emergency

• To prevent vehicle movement while
changing a tire, always set the
parking brake fully, and always
block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.
• We recommend that the wheels of
the vehicle be blocked, and that no
person remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.

1VQA4023

OPS063004

4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5.Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
from the jack position.

6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.

6 11

What to do in an emergency

OPS063006
OAM069009

OPS063005

7.Place the jack at the front (1) or
rear (2) jacking position closest to
the tire you are changing. Place the
jack at the designated locations
under the frame.

6 12

8.Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm. (1 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.

9.Loosen the wheel nuts and remove
them with your fingers. Slide the
wheel off the studs and lay it flat so
it cannot roll away. To put the wheel
on the hub, pick up the spare tire,
line up the holes with the studs and
slide the wheel onto them. If this is
difficult, tip the wheel slightly and
get the top hole in the wheel lined
up with the top stud. Then jiggle the
wheel back and forth until the
wheel can slide over the other
studs.
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury. Before putting the
wheel into place, be sure that there
is nothing on the hub or wheel (such
as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that prevents the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.

What to do in an emergency

WARNING - Installing a
wheel
Make sure the wheel makes
good contact with the hub when
installed. If the contact of the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.

10. To install the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Insert the wrench into the jack
and lower the vehicle to the
ground by turning the wheel nut
wrench counterclockwise.
OPS063007

Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening
every nut following the numerical
sequence shown in the image until
they are all tight. Then double-check
each nut for tightness. After changing
wheels, have an authorized Kia dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)
6 13

What to do in an emergency

If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
is not replaced, dust and dirt may get
into the tire valve and air may leak
from the tire. If you lose a valve cap,
buy another and install it as soon as
possible.
After you have changed the wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.

6 14

CAUTION - Reusing lug
nuts
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the
stud so that it must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing the
spare tire. Adjust it to the specified
pressure, if necessary. Refer to
“Tires and wheels” in chapter 8.

What to do in an emergency

Important - use of compact spare
tire (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.

CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.

WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
50 mph (80 km/h). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as possible to
avoid failure of the spare possibly leading to personal injury or
death.
The compact spare should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).

✽ NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.

6 15

What to do in an emergency

• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic vehicle wash while the
compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.

6 16

• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other vehicle components may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.

What to do in an emergency

Jack label
■ Example
■ Type A

OHYK064001
■ Type B

OHYK064002

❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date

6 17

What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
When two or more tires are flat, do
not use the tire mobility kit because
the supported one sealant of Tire
Mobility Kit is only used for one flat
tire.

OAM060013L

For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

6 18

Introduction

WARNING - Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls. This can result in an accident due to tire failure.
OPS063008

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tire.
After you ensured that the tire is
properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (distance up to 200
km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of
(80 km/h) in order to reach a service
station or tire dealer for the tire
replacement.

What to do in an emergency

It is possible that some tires, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the suggested use of
the Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires. Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are damaged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).
Please contact the nearest Kia
dealership if the tire cannot be
made roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pressure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below -30°C (22°F).

6 19

What to do in an emergency

9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.

WARNING - Sealant
OAM060015L

0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
6 20

4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. On/off switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Screw cap for reducing tire inflation pressure

• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
Strictly
follow
the
specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.

What to do in an emergency

Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Detach the speed restriction label
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast.
2. Screw connection hose (9) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
3. Ensure that screw cap (8) is
closed.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose (2) of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing (4) of the compressor so
that the bottle is upright.

OPS063008

OPS043204

6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.

7.Plug the compressor power cord
into the front passenger side power
outlet of the vehicle.

WARNING
Only use the front passenger
side power outlet when connecting the power cord.

6 21

What to do in an emergency

8. With the engine start/stop button
position on or ignition switch position on, switch on the compressor
and let it run for approximately 5~7
minutes to fill the sealant up to
proper pressure. (refer to the Tire
and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling
is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the tire
and stay away from the tire when
filling it.

WARNING - Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 200kpa (29 PSI). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.

6 22

9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.

WARNING - Carbon
monoxide
Do not leave your vehicle running in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.

Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
7~10km (4~6miles or, about
10min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be stained by sealant.
Therefore, remove the tire pressure
sensors and wheel stained by
sealant and have it serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.

What to do in an emergency

Checking the tire inflation pressure
1.After
driving
approximately
7~10km (4~6miles or about
10min), stop at a safety location.
2.Connect connection hose (9) of the
compressor directly to the tire
valve.
3.Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recommended tire inflation.
With the ignition switched on, proceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pressure : Switch on the compressor,
position I. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.

✽ NOTICE
The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the
compressor is running. To get an
accurate tire pressure, the compressor needs to be turned off.
- To reduce the inflation pressure: Loosen the screw cap (8)
on the compressor hose.

CAUTION - Tire pressure
sensor
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by Kia, the tire pressure sensors may be damaged
by sealant. The sealant on the
tire pressure sensor and wheel
should be removed when you
replace the tire with a new one
and inspect the tire pressure
sensors in authorized dealer.

6 23

What to do in an emergency

Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure:
6 bar (87 psi)
Size
Compressor: 170 x 150 x 60 mm
(6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in.)
Sealant bottle: 85 x 70 ø mm
(3.3 x 2.8 ø in.)
Compressor weight:
0.8 kg (1.77 lbs)
Sealant volume:
200 ml (12.2 cu. in.)

6 24

What to do in an emergency
TOWING
For trailer towing guidelines information, refer to “Trailer towing” in chapter 5.

Towing service

dolly

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.

WARNING
- Side and curtaion AB
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the
ignition switch to LOCK or ACC
position when the vehicle is
being towed.
The side and curtain air bag
may deploy when the ignitions
is ON, and the rollover sensor
detects the situation as a
rollover.

dolly
OXM069028

If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.

6 25

What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook (front)
(if equipped)

OUN046030

CAUTION - Towing gear
position
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle.

OCM054034

CAUTION - Towing
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.

6 26

OPS063009

1.Remove the towing hook from the
tool case.
2.Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front bumper.

What to do in an emergency

Emergency towing
Front

OPS063010

3.Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.

OPS063010
Rear (if equipped)

OPS063012

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front (or rear) of
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver
must be in the vehicle to steer it and
operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequently.

6 27

What to do in an emergency

• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle other
than the tow hooks for towing may
damage the body of your vehicle.
• Only use a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the cable
or chain to the towing hook provided.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it
steadily and with even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do
not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight
ahead.

6 28

OPA067014

• Use a towing strap less than 5 m
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loose during towing.

Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than usual since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steering system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neutral.
Be sure the steering is unlocked by
placing the ignition switch in the
ACC position. A driver must be in
the towed vehicle to operate the
steering and brakes.

What to do in an emergency

CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• To avoid serious damage to
the automatic transaxle, limit
the vehicle speed to 15 km/h
(10 mph) and drive less than
1.5 km (1 mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the automatic transaxle for fluid leaks
under your vehicle. If the automatic transaxle fluid is leaking, a flatbed equipment or
towing dolly must be used.

6 29

Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-23
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-47
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62

• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Brake/clutch fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Checking the brake/clutch fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
• Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-82
• High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-84
• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86

Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94

Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ 1.6L GDI

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Radiator cap
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Negative battery terminal
9. Fuse box
10. Air cleaner

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OPS073001

7 3

Maintenance

■ 2.0L GDI

1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Positive battery terminal
7. Negative battery terminal
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Radiator cap
10. Engine oil dipstick
* : if equipped

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OPS073002

7 4

Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.
Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have an authorized
Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factory
trained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽ NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.

We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. An authorized
Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service
quality standards and receives technical support from Kia in order to provide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.

You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty & Consumer
Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.

7 5

Maintenance

Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized Kia dealer with special tools.

✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty & Consumer
Information manual provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer.

7 6

WARNING - Maintenance
work
Do not wear jewelry or loose
clothing while working under
the hood of your vehicle with
the engine running. These can
become entangled in moving
parts, if you must run the engine
while working under the hood,
make certain that you remove
all jewelry (especially rings,
bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves,
and similar loose clothing
before getting near the engine
or cooling fans.

Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
Check if the front of the radiator
and condenser are clean and not
blocked with leaves, dirt or insects
etc. If any of the above parts are
extremely dirty or you are not sure
of their condition, take your vehicle
to an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure. This could
cause burns or other serious
injury.

While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straightahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).

7 7

Maintenance

At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or
damage.
• Check the windshield washer
spray and wiper operation. Clean
the wiper blades with clean cloth
dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.

7 8

At least once a year:
• Clean the body and door drain
holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and
checks, and hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate the automatic transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.

Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, follow the
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 32°C (90°F).

If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 120
months or 240,000 km (150,000
miles) continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.

7 9

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep
receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or
timing belt.
*2 Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be
maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters
like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately
regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.
*3 Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur
or tension is reduced excessively.

7 10

*5 When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant
additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in
the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant
mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine
damage.
*6 If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one
bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
12,000 km or 6 months

(Continued)

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *6
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect visually the following items.
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

(Continued)

7 11

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
24,000 km or 12 months

(Continued)

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
(Continued)

7 12

❑ Add fuel additive *6
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
48,000 km or 24 months

(Continued)

❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *1

12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *

❑ Add fuel additive *6
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
(Every 60,000 km or 48 months)

❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

(Continued)

7 13

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)

72,000 km or 36 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect cooling system *1

❑ Add fuel additive *6 (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

(Continued)

7 14

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
96,000 km or 48 months

(Continued)

❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Inspect drive belt *4
(First, 96,000 km or 72 months
after every 24,000 km or 24 months)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect fuel filter *2

❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Add fuel additive *6
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

(Continued)

7 15

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
120,000 km or 60 months

(Continued)

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Inspect drive belt *4
(First 96,000 km or 72 months after
every 24,000 km or 24 months)

❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
(Every 60,000 km or 48 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *6
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

(Continued)

7 16

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
144,000 km or 72 months

(Continued)

❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Inspect drive belt *4
(First 96,000 km or 72 months after
every 24,000 km or 24 months)

9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑ Inspect fuel filter *2

❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2

❑ Add fuel additive *6
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect valve clearance (Engine 1.6) *3
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

(Continued)

7 17

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
168,000 km or 84 months

(Continued)

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *1

Lubricate all locks and hinges
Parking brakes
Steering operation and linkage
Suspension mounting bolts

❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑ Inspect drive belt *4
(First 96,000 km or 72 months after
every 24,000 km or 24 months)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑ Add fuel additive *6
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
(Every 60,000 km or 48 months)

❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated),

❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

(Continued)

7 18

11)
12)
13)
14)

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
192,000 km or 96 months

(Continued)

❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *1

10)
11)
12)
13)
14)

Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
Lubricate all locks and hinges
Parking brakes
Steering operation and linkage
Suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect drive belt *4
(First 96,000 km or 72 months after
every 24,000 km or 24 months)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Replace engine coolant*5
(First, 192,000 km or 120 months
after every 48,000 km or 24 months)

❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2

❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *6 (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

(Continued)

7 19

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
216,000 km or 108 months

(Continued)

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect cooling system *1

❑ Add fuel additive *6
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect drive belt *
(First 96,000 km or 72 months after
every 24,000 km or 24 months)
4

❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)

7 20

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
240,000 km or 120 months

(Continued)

❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect fuel filter *2

❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

❑ Replace engine coolant *5
(First 192,000 km or 120 months
after every 48,000 km or 24 months)

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *

❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
(Every 60,000 km or 48 months)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Add fuel additive *6
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)

No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

7 21

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM

MAINTENANCE
OPERATION

MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS

DRIVING
CONDITION

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

EVERY 6,000 km OR 6 months

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K

AIR CLEANER FILTER

MORE FREQUENTLY

C, E

SPARK PLUGS

MORE FREQUENTLY

A, B, H, I, K

DISC BRAKE/ PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

MORE FREQUENTLY

C, D, G, H

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/ LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

MORE FREQUENTLY

C, D, G, H

MORE FREQUENTLY

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

EVERY 12,000 km OR 6 months

C, D, E, F, G, H

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

EVERY 120,000 km

A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

EVERY 90,000 km

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

MORE FREQUENTLY

C, E

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ LOWER
ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BSALL JOINT

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving shorts distanse of less than 8 km in normal temperature or less than 16 km in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread
roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very
cold weather

7 22

E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°F)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 170 km/h
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter

Fuel filter (cartridge)

The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the
vehicle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter
changes are required.

A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
Fuel filters should be installed by an
authorized Kia dealer.

Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized Kia dealer
replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

7 23

Maintenance

Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving components which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.

7 24

Air cleaner filter

Cooling system

A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.

Check the cooling system components, such as the radiator, coolant
reservoir, hoses and connections for
leakage and damage. Replace any
damaged parts.

Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.

Coolant

Valve clearance (if equipped)

The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Inspect for excessive valve noise
and/or engine vibration and adjust if
necessary. An authorized Kia dealer
should perform the operation.

Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
Kia dealer
in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this section.

Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is the normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.

CAUTION - Transaxle fluids
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.

Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)

Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors

Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.

Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
For more information on checking
the pads or lining wear limit, we recommend you to refer to the Kia website.
(http://www.kiatechinfo.com)

Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. The level should
be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks
on the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake lever (or
pedal) and cables.

7 25

Maintenance

Suspension mounting bolts

Drive shafts and boots

Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.

Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.

Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.

7 26

Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.

Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
■ Type A

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.

■ Type A

WARNING - Radiator
hose
OAM072001
■ Type B

Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.

OAM072003
■ Type B

5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.

CAUTION - Replacing
OPS073003

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating temperature.

engin oil
• Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine
oil. If you drop the engine oil
on the engine room, wipe it off
immediately.

OPS073004

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine components.

7 27

Maintenance

Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in chapter 8.)

Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized Kia dealer according
to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.

WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time.
Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as
soon as possible after handling
used oil.

7 28

Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the coolant level

WARNING
Removing radiator
cap

Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal injury
from escaping hot coolant or
steam.

Turn the engine off and wait until it
cools down. Use extreme care when
removing the radiator cap. Wrap a
thick towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the first
stop. Step back while the pressure is
released from the cooling system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to
remove it.

7 29

Maintenance

WARNING - Cooling fan
Use caution when
working near the
blade of the cooling
fan. The
electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by engine coolant
temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. it may
sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running.

OXM079006

Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side
of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion.
Bring the level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required,
see an authorized Kia dealer for a
cooling system inspection.

7 30

Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycolbased coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.

Maintenance

Changing the coolant

For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Ambient
Temperature
-15°C (5°F)
-25°C (-13°F)
-35°C (-31°F)
-45°C (-49°F)

Have the coolant changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such as
the alternator.

Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze
35
40
50
60

Water
65
60
50
40
OPS073005

WARNING
Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure which may result in
serious injury.

7 31

Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Checking the brake/clutch*
fluid level

CAUTION - Proper fluid
Only use brake fluid in brake
system. Small amounts of
improper fluids (such as engine
oil) can cause damage to the
brake system.

OXM079008

Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean
the area around the reservoir cap
thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch*
fluid contamination.
* if equipped

7 32

If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings and/or
clutch disc (if equipped). If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake/clutch* system checked by an
authorized KIA dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch*
fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in chapter 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake/clutch* system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
When
changing
and
adding
brake/clutch* fluid, handle it carefully.
Do not let it come in contact with
your eyes. If brake/ clutch* fluid
should come in contact with your
eyes, immediately flush them with a
large quantity of fresh tap water.
Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.

Maintenance

CAUTION - Brake/clutch*
fluid
Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid
to contact the vehicle's body
paint, as paint damage will
result.
Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an extended
time should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.

7 33

Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
■ Type A

OPS073006
■ Type B

OPS073007

The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.

7 34

Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

WARNING - Flammable
Fluid
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open
flames or sparks. The windshield washer fluid reservoir is
flammable under certain circumstances. This can result in a
fire.

Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
Checking the parking brake

OPS053011

Check the stroke of the parking
brake by counting the number of
“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it
from the released position. Also, the
parking brake alone should securely
hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
grade. If the stroke is more or less
than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of
20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).

7 35

Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement

OAM079043

It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.

7 36

OAM079044

OAM079046

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.

Maintenance

Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this chapter.)

CAUTION
- Air filter maintenance
• Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.

7 37

Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is
operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.

OPS073008

1. Open the glove box.

7 38

OPS073009

2. With the glove box open, remove
the Air filter cover.

Maintenance

OPS073010

OPS073011

3. Remove the climate control air filter case by pulling out both sides
of the cover.

4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly. Otherwise,
the system may produce noise and
the effectiveness of the filter may be
reduced.

7 39

Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commercial vehicle washes. If the blades are
not wiping properly, clean both the
window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.

Blade inspection

1JBA5122

Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic vehicle washes have been
known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

7 40

CAUTION - Wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.

Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade

1JBA7037
OHM078059

Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.

1LDA5023

Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.

CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.

1JBA7038

CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.

2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.

7 41

Maintenance

Rear window wiper blade

OHM078060

OHM078061

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then
pull down the blade assembly and
remove it.

3. Install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.

7 42

OHM078062

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.

Maintenance

OHM078063

2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have an
authorized Kia dealer replace the
wiper blade.

7 43

Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service

WARNING - Risk of
explosion
Keep lighted cigarettes
and all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.

OXM079100

• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.

7 44

The battery contains
hydrogen -- a highly
combustible gas which
will explode if it comes
in contact with a flame or
spark.
Keep batteries out of the
reach
of
children
because batteries contain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection
when charging or working near a battery.
Always provide ventilation when working in an
enclosed space.

Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected.

Maintenance

Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel
pain or burning sensation,
get medical attention immediately.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.

WARNING
- Risk of electrocution
Never touch the electrical ignition system while the vehicle is
running. This system works
with high voltage which can
"zap" you.

✽ NOTICE
If you connect unauthorized electronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use
unauthorized devices.

Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.

7 45

Maintenance

When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from
the vehicle and placed in an area
with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or
flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging,
and stop or reduce the charging
rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if the
temperature of the electrolyte of
any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.

7 46

• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.

Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See chapter 4)
• Sunroof (See chapter 4)
• Trip computer (See chapter 4)
• Climate control system
(See chapter 4)
• Clock (See chapter 4)
• Audio (See chapter 4)

Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care

WARNING - Tire under

For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, vehicle
handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
8.

OXM079101L

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.

inflation
Inflate your tire consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe under inflation
can lead to severe heat buildup, causing blowouts, tread
separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss
of vehicle control. This risk is
much higher on hot days and
when driving for long periods at
high speeds.
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

7 47

Maintenance

• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by
28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.

7 48

Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than 1.6
km (one mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.

Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.

How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Kia recommends
that you check the spare every
time you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.

Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
8.

7 49

Maintenance

Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.

Without a spare tire

Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to left.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
(if equipped) for tire rotation.
S2BLA790A

Directional tires (if equipped)

WARNING - Mixing tires
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics.

Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.

CAUTION - Wheel weight
CBGQ0707A

7 50

Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.

Maintenance

The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. The tire size
affects wheel speed. When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same
size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) to work irregularly.

Tire replacement
Tread wear indicator

✽ NOTICE
OEN076053

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.

We recommend that when replacing
tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that
affects driving performance.

Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.

7 51

Maintenance

Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper
height.

7 52

CAUTION - Wheels
Wheels that do not meet Kia’s
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.

Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road to
reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle.

Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.

Maintenance

Tire sidewall labeling
1
5,6
7
4

I030B04JM

This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.

2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your vehicle. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P235/65R17 108T

108 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.

Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX17

Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.

7 53

Maintenance

Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicle tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
Z

7 54

Maximum Speed
180 km/h (112 mph)
190 km/h (118 mph)
210 km/h (130 mph)
240 km/h (149 mph)
240 km/h (Above 149 mph)

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2015.

WARNING - Tire age
Replace tires within the recommended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.

Maintenance

4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.

6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recommend that tires be replaced after
approximately
six (6) years of normal service. Heat
caused by hot climates or frequent
high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process.

7 55

Maintenance

Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.

7 56

Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.

Maintenance

Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories
are,
automatic
transaxle, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg
(150 pounds).

7 57

Maintenance

Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
7 58

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due to
curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.

Maintenance

All season tires

Snow tires

Radial-ply tires

Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.

If you equip your vehicle with snow
tires, they should be the same size
and have the same load capacity as
the original tires. Snow tires should
be installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4
psi) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard
tires on the tire label on the driver's
side of the center pillar, or up to the
maximum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75
mph) when your vehicle is equipped
with snow tires.

Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.

Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
if you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.

7 59

Maintenance

Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.

7 60

Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires.

CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
- If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.

Maintenance

CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leakage from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.

7 61

Maintenance
FUSES
■ Blade type

Normal

Blown

■ Cartridge type

Normal

Blown

■ Multi fuse

Normal

Blown

Blown
OLM079051N

7 62

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will melt.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: micro
mini type for lower amperage rating,
cartridge type, and multi fuse for
higher amperage ratings.

WARNING - Fuse
replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
• Replace the fuse with the ignition “OFF”, switch off of all
electrical devices and then
separation (-) terminal from
the battery in a safe place.
• Do not arbitrarily modify or
add-on electric wiring of the
vehicle.

Maintenance

CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.

✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.

WARNING - Fuse fire
• When replacing a blown fuse
or relay with a new one, make
sure the new fuse or relay fits
tightly into the clips The
incomplete fastening fuse or
relay may cause the vehicle
wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts. The fuses,
relays and terminals may be
fastened incompletely, and it
may cause a possible fire. If
fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, we recommend that
you consult with an authorized Kia dealer.
• Do not plug in screwdrivers or
aftermarket wiring into the terminal originally designed for
fuse and relays only. The electrical system and wiring of the
vehicle interior may be damaged or burned due to contact
failure.

Inner panel fuse replacement

OPS073014

1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.

7 63

Maintenance

If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the power outlet
fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.

Fuse switch

OPS073017

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the fuse puller provided
on the engine compartment fuse
panel cover.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.

7 64

OPS073015

Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly.

Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
If you need to park your vehicle for
prolonged periods more than 1
month, move the transportation fuse
switch to the OFF position to prevent the battery being discharged.

Engine compartment fuse
replacement

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Fuse panel

OPS073016

1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the
cover up. When the blade type
fuse is disconnected, remove it by
using the clip designed for changing fuses located in the engine
room fuse box. Upon removal,
securely insert reserve fuse of
equal quantity.

covers
After checking the fuse panel in
the
engine
compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover with using cover locking
sound. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water contact.

7 65

Maintenance

Multi fuse

OPS073039

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.

✽ NOTICE
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
7 66

Maintenance

Fuse/relay panel description

OPS073014

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.

✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.

OPS073018

7 67

Maintenance

Inner fuse panel
Description

Fuse rating

POWER OUTLET 2

20A

P_OUTLET

ACC

10A

O_S_MIRR_SW, AMP, AUDIO/UVO/AVN 4.0_HEAD UNIT, BCM, TMU, MOOD_LAMP_UNIT,
SMK_UNIT, LDC_AMP(400W), LDC_AMP(200W)

POWER OUTLET 1

25A

C/LIGHT, REAR_P_OUTLET

DRL

10A

BCM(DAY_RUNNNIG_LIGHT_LAMP_POWER)

MODULE 6

7.5A

SUNROOF_MOTOR, LUGGAGE_PORTABLE_LAMP(CHARGE_POWER), SEAT_EXTN_DRV(HEATED), REAR_SEAT(IGN2)

WIPER FRT 2

25A

FRONT_WIPER_MOTOR(POWER), FRONT_WIPER_RLY(LOW)

WIPER RR

15A

REAR_WIPER_MOTOR, MULTI_FUNCTION_SW(WIPER), REAR_WIPER_RLY,
REAR_WIPER_RLY_COIL,

AMP

30A

AMP, LDC_AMP(400W)

MODULE 5

7.5A

BCM, SMK_UNIT

WIPER FRT 1

10A

MULTI_FUNCTION_SW(WIPER), BCM(WASHER_MOTOR_POWER),

HTD STRG

15A

STEERING_HEATED

A/CON 1

7.5A

AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), IONIZER, PTC_RLY_COIL, BLOWER_RLY_COIL

HTD MIRR

10A

OUTSIDE_MIRROR(HEATED), ECU(ELEC. LOAD DEFROST),
AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_MANUAL/AUTO(HEATED_SIGNAL)

7 68

Protected component

Maintenance

Description

Fuse rating

T/GATE OPEN

15A

T/GATE_OPEN_RLY(T/GATE_LATCH_MOTOR), T/GATE_OPEN_RLY_COIL

S/HEATER FRT

20A

FRONT_SEAT_EXTN(HEATED_POWER)

DR LOCK

20A

DOOR_LOCK_RLY, DOOR_LOCK_RLY_COIL, DOOR_UNLOCK_RLY_COIL, DEAD_LOCK_RLY,
DEAD_LOCK_RLY_COIL

A/BAG IND

7.5A

CLUSTER

A/BAG

15A

ACU, WCS_ECU

MODULE 4

10A

I_S_MIRR_ECM, AUTO_HLLD_ECU

STOP LAMP

15A

HAZARD_SW(ESS_INDICATOR_POWER), STOP_SIGNAL_ELECTRONIC_MODULE

MODULE 7

10A

SPORTS_MODE_SW(ATM_SHIFT_LOCK_SOLENOID), KEY_LOCK_SOLENOID

S/HEATER RR

20A

REAR_SEAT(HEATED_POWER)

P/WDW RH

25A

FRONT_P/WINDOW_SW(POWER), P/WINDOW_SAFETY_ECU(POWER)

P/WDW LH

25A

FRONT_P/WINDOW_SW(POWER), P/WINDOW_SAFETY_ECU(POWER)

MODULE 1

10A

BCM, SEAT_EXTN_DRV

BRAKE SWITCH 1

10A

ABS/ESP_UNIT, LDC_AMP(400W)

10A

LOWER_SW, CENTER_SW, TPMS_UNIT, REAR_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_SNSR, SMART_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_SNSR, SMART_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_UNIT,
AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), LANE_DEPARTURE_WARNING_SYSTEM_UNIT,
STOP_LP_SW, WATER_FUEL_SNSR

MODULE 2

Protected component

7 69

Maintenance

Description

7 70

Fuse rating

Protected component

MODULE 3

10A

SHIFT_LEVER_MODULE, REAR_SEAT_WARMER_SW, REAR_SEAT_WARMER, DIAGNOSIS, AVN
4.0_HEAD_UNIT, LDC_AMP(200W), TMU, HLLD_SW, HLLD_ACTR, OIL_LEVEL_SNSR,

ECU

7.5A

ENGINE_CONTROL_UNIT, AIR_FLOW_SNSR, START_RLY_COIL, SMK_UNIT, SMATRA_IMMOBILIZATION

I.O.D 2

15A

LDC_AMP(200W), AUDIO/UVO/AVN4.0_HEAD_UNIT, TMU

I.O.D 3

7.5A

OUTSIDE_MIRROR_FOLDING_RLY, OUTSIDE_MIRROR_FOLDING_RLY_COIL, OUTSIDE_MIRROR_UNFOLDING_RLY, OUTSIDE_MIRROR_UNFOLDING_RLY_COIL

CLUSTER

10A

CLUSTER

TCU

15A

SPEED_SNSR (MT), BACK_UP_LAMP_SW, OIL_PUMP_INVERTER, INHIBITOR,
TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT

I.O.D 4

7.5A

OBDII(POWER), TPMS_UNIT(POWER), CLUSTER, AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), BCM,
REAR_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_BUZZER

SPARE

10A

SUNROOF 2

20A

SUNROOF_MOTOR(POWER)

P/SEAT DRV

30A

FRNT_SEAT_EXTN(POWER)

SUNROOF 1

20A

SUNROOF_MOTOR(POWER)

MDPS

7.5A

MDPS_UNIT

A/CON 2

7.5A

AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_MANUAL(MAX_BLOWER), AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_AUTO(BLOWER_MOTOR)

START

7.5A

E/R_FUSE & RELAY_BOX(RELAY - START / SUB START), PDM

Maintenance

Description

Fuse rating

Protected component

I.O.D 1

7.5A

GLOVE_BOX_LAMP, DOOR_WARNING_SW, OVER_HEAD_CONSOLE_LAMP, PERSONAL_LAMP,
SUNVISOR_LAMP, LUGGAGE_LAMP, PORTABLE_LAMP(DOOR)

PDM 2

7.5A

SMK_UNIT(BATT_CPU), SMATRA_IMMOBILIZATION(BATT)

PDM 1

20A

SMK_UNIT(POWER)

BRAKE SWITCH 2

10A

STOP_LAMP_SW(NORMAL_OPEN), SMK_UNIT

7 71

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

OPS073013

OPS073019

7 72

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel
Description

Fuse rating

IG1

40A

IGN_SW(B1), BUTTON_START_RLY(IG1), BUTTON_START_RLY(ACC)

Protected component

BLOWER

40A

BLOWER_RLY, BLOWER_MOTOR

RR HTD

40A

REAR_GLASS_HEATED_RLY,

ECU 2

30A

MAIN_RLY, MAIN_RLY_COIL

ECU 3

15A

ECU(AFTER_AIN_RELAY)

IGN COIL

20A

IGNITION_COIL(POWER)

ECU 1

20A

ECU(AFTER_MAIN_RELAY)

SENSOR 1

10A

STOP_LAMP_SW(NORMAL_CLOSE), O2_SNSR, PURGE_CONTROL_SOLENOID_VALVE, OCV,

SENSOR 2

10A

CMP, COOLING_FAN_LOW_RLY_COIL

INJECTOR

10A

B/UP LAMP

10A

RR_COMBI_LAMP(BACK_UP_LAMP)

WIPER

10A

ECU(WIPER_SWITCH)

F/PUMP

15A

FUEL_PUMP_MOTOR

HORN

15A

HORN_RLY, HORN_RLY_COIL, HORN

H/LAMP WASHER

20A

HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_RLY, HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_RLY_COIL, HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_MOTOR

7 73

Maintenance

7 74

Description

Fuse rating

Protected component

B+ 1

50A

SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+1)

B+ 2

50A

SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+2)

B+ 3

50A

SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+3)

IG2

40A

IGN_SW(IG2), BUTTON_START_RLY(IG2), START_RLY

MDPS

80A

MDPS_UNIT

ALT

125A

ALTERNATOR

TCU

20A

TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT

DEICER

20A

DEICER

ECU 4

15A

ECU(BATT_DIRECT)

ECU 5

15A

ECU(BATT_DIRECT)

A/CON

10A

A/CON_RLY

C/FAN

40A

COOLING_FAN_MOTOR, SUB_FUEL_PUMP, SUB_FUEL_VALVE

INVERTER

50A

OIL_PUMP_INVERTER

ABS 1

40A

ABS/ESP_UNIT(MOTOR)

ABS 2

30A

ABS/ESP_UNIT(SOLENOID)

Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
WARNING - Lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.

Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.

CAUTION
- Light replacement
Be sure to replace the burnedout bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.

• If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized Kia dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be
removed before you can get to the
bulb. This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlight
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
• Do not install additional bulb or
LED. If you install that, the lamp
may not be operated properly and
fuse box or electric wiring system
may have problem.

Headlight, position light, turn
signal light, side marker light
and front fog light bulb
replacement
■ Type A

OPS073020
■ Type B

OPS073021

7 75

Maintenance

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Headlight (High)
Headlight (Low)
Front side marker light
Front turn signal
Front position light
Front fog light (if equipped)

If the headlight aiming adjustment is
necessary after the headlight
assembly is reinstalled, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.

OHD076046

WARNING - Halogen
bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce
flying pieces of glass if broken.

7 76

• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids. Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat and
burst when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed in a
headlight.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.

Maintenance

Headlight (HID type)
If the light bulb is not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.

WARNING - HID
Headlight low beam
(if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock danger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb) is not working, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽ NOTICE
HID lamps have superior performance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
are estimated by the manufacturer
to last twice as long or longer than
halogen bulbs depending on their
frequency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point
in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
headlamps on and off more than
typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the
same manner as halogen incandescent lamps. If a headlamp goes out
after a period of operation but will
immediately relight when the headlamp switch is cycled it is likely the
HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID
lighting components are more complex than conventional halogen
bulbs thus have higher replacement
cost.

OPS073051

OPS073028

1. Turn off the engine and open the
hood. Disconnect the negative
battery cable.
2. Disconnect the power connector
from the back of the headlight
assembly.
3. Loosen the retaining bolts.
7 77

Maintenance

Headlight bulb (High)
■ Type A

OPS073046

4.Pull out the end of the front
bumper.
5.Remove the headlight assembly
from the body of the vehicle.

OPS073047
■ Type B

If you can reach the bulb without
removing the headlight assembly,
you do not need to do step 3,4 and 5.
OPS073026

Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the previous page.
6.Remove the headlight bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
7.Disconnect the headlight bulb
socket-connector.
7 78

8.Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining wire by depressing the end and
pushing it upward.
9.Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly.
10. Install a new headlight bulb and
snap the headlight bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
11. Connect the headlight bulb socket connector.
12. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
13. Connect the power connector to
the back of the headlight assembly.
14. Reinstall the headlight assembly
to the body of the vehicle.

Maintenance

Headlight bulb (Low)

8.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the housing and rotating in until it
locks into place.
9.Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.

■ Type A

Front turn signal/position light
■ Type A

Turn signal

OPS073047
■ Type B

Low

OPS073049

■ Type B

Turn signal

OPS073024

High
OPS073023

Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the previous page.
6.Remove the headlight bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
7.Remove the bulb from the assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

Position

OPS073048

7 79

Maintenance

Bulb type
Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the previous page.
6. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
9. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly and
turning the socket clockwise.
10. Reinstall the light assembly to
the body of the vehicle.

7 80

LED type
If the light bulb is not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.

Front side marker

OPS073025

Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the previous page.
6.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7.Pull the bulb out of the socket.
8.Insert a new bulb into the socket.
9.Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots on the assembly and
turning the socket clockwise.

Maintenance

Front fog lamp bulbs
(if equipped)

OPS073028

3. Disconnect the power connector
from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on
the socket with the slots in the
housing. Push the socket into the
housing and turn the socket clockwise.
6. Connect the power connector to
the socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under
cover.

Side repeater light bulb
replacement (if equipped)

OPS073035

If the light bulb is not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.

✽ NOTICE

OPS073027

If the headlight aiming adjustment
is necessary after the headlight
assembly is reinstalled, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.

1. Remove the front bumper under
cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.

7 81

Maintenance

Rear combination light bulb
replacement
■ Type A

(5) Tail light
(6) Tail/Stop light and side marker
(LED)

OPS073031
OPS073030
■ Type B

OPS073029

(1) Tail light and side marker
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Stop and tail light
7 82

1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retaining screws with a philips head
screwdriver.
3. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the
vehicle.

Maintenance

Tail light and side marker, Turn
signal light and Stop and tail light
■ Type A
Tail and side maker
Turn signal
Tail

Tail and stop
OPS073032
■ Type B

5. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly and
turning the socket clockwise.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.

Back-up light

Back-up

OPS073032

Turn
signal
Back-up

OPS073045
OPS073034

4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.

Follow the steps 1 to 3 from the previous page.
4.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7 83

Maintenance

5.Pull the bulb out of the socket.
6.Insert a new bulb into the socket.
7.Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots on the assembly and
turning the socket clockwise.
8.Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.

High mounted stop light
replacement

Bulb type

OPS073037
OPS073036

OPS073038
OPS073052

1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Loosen the retaining bolts.

7 84

4. Pull out the module from the high
mounted stop light assembly by
pulling both clips.
5. Replace the bulbs by pulling it out.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order.

Maintenance

LED type (if equipped)

License plate light bulb
replacement

OPS073053

5.Replace the LED with new one.
6.Reinstall in the reverse order.

OPS073050

1. Remove the lens by pressing the
tabs.
2. Remove the socket from the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
counter clockwise.
4. Install a new bulb in the socket
and install the socket to the lens.
5. Reinstall the lens securely.

7 85

Maintenance

Map lamp

Luggage lamp

Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.

Room lamp
Vanity mirror lamp

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.

Glove box lamp

OPS073041/OPS073042/OPS073043/
OPS073044/OXM079041

7 86

WARNING - Interior lights
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or damage the lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.

Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least once
a month with lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors and rocker
panels are kept clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if they
have been affected by water. If braking
performance is impaired, dry the
brakes by applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward speed.
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not operate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.

7 87

Maintenance

OJB037800

CAUTION - Wetting
engine
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.

7 88

Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

✽ NOTICE
Do not apply wax on embossed
unpainted unit, as it may tarnish the
unit.

CAUTION - Drying vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, acid detergents
or strong detergents containing high alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or
anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to
the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.

Maintenance

Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies
anti-corrosion materials to the parts
repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of the doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rusting.

7 89

Maintenance

Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch or damage the
finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
highspeed vehicle wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergents It may damage and corrode the aluminum wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.

7 90

Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produce vehicles of
the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle’s surface by
moisture that evaporates slowly.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it dries slowly and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.

Maintenance

High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
beginning by observing the following:

Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.

• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.

Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

7 91

Maintenance

Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting and cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the vehicle.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
7 92

Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. If necessary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product
instructions for correct usage.

CAUTION - Electrical
components
Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic
components inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.

CAUTION - Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.

Maintenance

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not properly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fireresistant properties.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with a
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION - Rear window
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage of the rear
window defroster grid.

7 93

Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Maintenance booklet in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized Kia dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

7 94

Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.

1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)

Maintenance

Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control solenoid valve.

3. Exhaust emission control
system

Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.

Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.

The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle performance.

Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poisoning.

7 95

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.

7 96

Operating precautions for catalytic converters

WARNING
- Catalytic converter
Keep away from the catalytic
converter and exhaust system
while the vehicle is running or
immediately thereafter. The
exhaust and catalytic systems
are very hot and may burn you.

WARNING - Fire
• Do not park, idle or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

Maintenance

Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.

7 97

Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Capacity/Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended sae viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Specifications & Consumer information
DIMENSIONS
Item
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Front tread

Rear tread
Wheelbase

mm (in)
4,140 (162.9)
1,800 (70.9)
1,600 (62.9) *1/1,615 (63.6) *2/1,612 (63.5) *3
205/60R16
1,576 (62.1)
215/55R17
1,568 (61.7)
235/45R18
1,560 (61.4)
205/60R16
1,588 (62.5)
215/55R17
1,580 (62.2)
235/45R18
1,573 (61.9)
2,570 (101.2)

*1 without roof rack
*2 with roof rack
*3 with sunroof and roof rack

ENGINE
Item
Displacement
cc (cu. in)
Bore x Stroke
mm (in.)

1.6L

2.0L

1,591 (97.1)

1,999 (121.9)

77x85.44 (3.03x3.36)

81x97 (3.19x3.81)

Firing order

1-3-4-2

No. of cylinders

4. In-line

8 2

Specifications & Consumer information
BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb
Headlamps (Low/High)
Headlamps (Low)
Headlamps (Low)-HID type*
Headlamps (High)
Front Front turn signal lamps
Front position lamps
Front fog lamps*
Front side marker
Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror)*
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (Bottom)
Bulb Type
Rear tail lamps (Mid)
Rear tail lamps & side marker (Top)
Rear Stop lamps
LED Type
Rear
Rear Tail lamps & side marker
Rear turn signal lamps
Back-up lamps
High mounted stop lamps
License plate lamps
Map lamps
Room lamps
Personal lamps
Interior
Vanity mirror lamps
Glove box lamps
Luggage lamp

Wattage
55/60
55
35
55
28
8 (Opt : LED)
35
5
LED
28/8
5
5
LED
LED
27
16
5 (Opt :LED*)
5
8
8
LED
5
5
8

Bulb type
H13
H7SLL
D3S
H7LL
PY28/8W
PY28/8W (Opt : LED)
H8L
W5W
LED
P28/8W
W5W
W5W
LED
LED
PY27W
W16W
W5W (Opt : LED*)
W5W
FESTOON
FESTOON
LED
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON

* If equipped

8 3

Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
Inflation pressure bar kPa (psi)
Normal load

Maximum load

(

)

(

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

230 (33)

Item

Tire size

Wheel sizee

Full size tire

205/60R16
215/55R17
235/45R18

6.5JX16
6.5JX17
7.5JX18

T125/80D16

4.0TX16

420 (60)

Compact spare tire
(if equipped)

)

9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
420 (60)

420 (60)

CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

✽ NOTICE
We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles.
If not, that affects driving performance.

8 4

Wheel lug nut torque
Kg·m (lb·ft, N·m)

Specifications & Consumer information
CAPACITY/WEIGHT
1.6 Engine

Item
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.)

2.0 Engine

M/T

A/T

M/T

A/T

1,740 (3,836)

1,770 (3,902)

1,860 (4,100)

Luggage volume (SAE)

Min : 686 (24.2)
Max : 1,735 (61.3)

l (cu ft)
Min : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.
Max : Behind front seat to roof.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Item
Refrigerant
Compressor lubricant

Weight of volume
550g
110g

Classification
R-134a
FD46XG (IDEMITSU)

We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.

8 5

Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant
Engine oil *1 *2
(drain and refill)
recommended
(or equivalent)

Volume

Classification

1.6 Engine

3.6 l (3.80 US qt.)

2.0 Engine

4.0 l (4.23 US qt.)

API Service SM*3 or obove
ILSAC GF-4 or above
ACEA A5 or above

1.6 Engine
Manual transaxle fluid
2.0 Engine

1.8~1.9 l
(1.9~2.0 US qt.)
1.9~2.0 l
(2.0~2.11 US qt.)

API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life)

7.3 l (7.71 US qt.)

MICHANG ATF SP-IV
SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV
Kia genuine ATF SP-IV

1.6 Engine
Automatic transaxle fluid
2.0 Engine

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute
to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements
are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

8 6

Specifications & Consumer information

Lubricant

Volume

1.6 Engine
Coolant
2.0 Engine
Brake/Clutch fluid
Fuel

M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T

5.1
5.0
5.1
5.0

l
l
l
l

(5.39
(5.29
(5.39
(5.29

US
US
US
US

Classification

qt.)
qt.)
qt.)
qt.)

Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum
radiator)

0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt.)

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

54 l (14.26 US gal.)

Refer to “Fuel requirements” in chapter 1

8 7

Specifications & Consumer information

Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining
any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and
other mechanisms that could be
damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather.

Using oils of any viscosity other than
those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle
will be operated in before the next oil
change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the
chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
Temperature
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
10W-30
Gasoline
Engine Oil *1
5W-20 (5W-30)
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the
engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM /
ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using
the engine oil viscosity chart.

8 8

50
120

Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL

OUN088001

OVQ076002N

The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the front passenger seat. To
check the number, remove the cover
(1).

The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.

OUN086004

The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).

8 9

Specifications & Consumer information
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL

ENGINE NUMBER
■ Engine 1.6

ORB080005
OUN086005

■ Engine 2.0

The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.

OAM082007L

The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.

8 10

Index

A
Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Limitation of Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
When Active ECO is activated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system . . . 3-39
Adding equipment to or modifying your
air bag-equipped vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Do not Installing a child restraint on a front
passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag . . 3-57
Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Side air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
SRS care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92

I 2

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Aux, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Speaker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Automatic heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . 4-115
Checking the amount of air conditioner
refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

B
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Index
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Parking brake - Hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Brake/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Checking the brake/clutch fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

C
Capacity/Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . 5-40
To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on. . 5-39
To turn cruise control off, do one of the following. . 5-41

D
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Impact sensing door unlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle . . . . . 4-20
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-19
Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

E
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6,7-3
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

I 3

Index
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Checking the engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine start/stop button position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Illuminated engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . 7-23
Exterior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Mounting bracket for roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

F
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Opening the fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . 1-3
Gasoline containing MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Use of MTBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

I 4

H
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

I
If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
If you have a flat tire (with Spare Tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Use of temporary compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit). . . . . . . 6-18
Checking the tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Distributing the sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . 6-23
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

Index
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Instrument Cluster Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Cargo area cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Luggage net holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Interior lamp AUTO cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Portable lamp usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98

Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Interior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Auto start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Auto stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Condition of ISG system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
ISG system deactivation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
ISG system malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

L
LCD Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
A/V Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

I 5

Index
Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-84
Interior light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-82
Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Headlamp escort. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

M
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

I 6

Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Manual transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

O
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

P
Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Sunshade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Index

R
Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Recommended sae viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

S
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Front seat adjustment - Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Highway driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Reducing the risk of a rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
FLEX steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

I 7

Index

T
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Closing the tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47,8-4
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Low aspect ratio tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . 7-47
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Wheel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

I 8

V
Vehicle Break-In Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
GVW (Gross vehicle weight). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

W
Warning and indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Index
Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-56
Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Check spark plugs and ignition system . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Don’t let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-57
Snowy or icy conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
To keep locks from freezing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system. . 5-56
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . . 5-56
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Blade inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

I 9

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : SKB0P77
Create Date                     : 2015:06:23 10:47:39-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2015:06:23 10:47:39-04:00
Title                           : 
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 81.157285, 2014/12/12-00:43:15
Metadata Date                   : 2015:06:23 10:47:39-04:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : SKB0P77
Document ID                     : uuid:c61c33bb-68d9-4a92-8f1e-1ddfb3954487
Instance ID                     : uuid:c418639b-6a61-41de-bd08-aa4e4ff4c7c7
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat Pro DC 15.7.20033
Page Count                      : 492

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Kia 2015 Soul Owners Manual Pdf 15soul En

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation